Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. and click. On the left side of the Options Bar. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. While working in the drawing area. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. click Toolbar. Then. TIP For example. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. notice a door type is specified. place the cursor over the menu name. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. To choose commands. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. and View. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Edit. click the command name to start the command. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command.

The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. 9 In the Type Selector.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. First. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. if you intend to add a door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. Within the drawing area. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool. You use the Type Selector in two ways. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . For example. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. notice the list of walls that are available. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . containing buttons grouped by function. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. 11 Click OK.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. immediately below the Type Selector.

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. delete. schedules. and group name. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. elevations. and rename views. walls. reports. In the Project Browser. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. families. sheets. family category (doors. families. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. click the tab. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. select Views (all). 3D). The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. windows). and groups. Navigating the User Interface | 13 .

so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. ■ 13 In the Type Selector.■ ■ To open a view. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. Do not click. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you create a browser organization scheme. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . double-click the name. click Wall. The browser is dockable. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. click Cancel.

In the Status Bar. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. The Status Bar also provides information. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. 18 On the Design Bar. in conjunction with Tooltips. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. When you place the cursor over a component. In this case.In the bottom left corner of the window. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. click Modify. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. 20 Press TAB. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. It highlights when the cursor is over it. regarding selected components within a view. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help.

you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Windows: From any window. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. For example. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. If there is no Help button displayed. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. click . Click the Help button. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu.rvt. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. You can use this tri-pane. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. There are several tools that help you find information. find a keyword on the Index tab. click Training Files. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. You can also press SHIFT+F1. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help.

click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 On the View toolbar. 8 Click in the drawing area. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom.

Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. roll the wheel to zoom the view. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and double-click 2nd Flr. Without clicking in the dialog. and drag the cursor. on the View toolbar. click . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. bottoms. These are the drag controls. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. To modify or add snap increments. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Zoom. Similar controls. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). Cnst.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. If you do not have a wheel mouse. display along the ends. 14 Enter ZR. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. called drag controls. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. expand Views (all). and select the wall. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. On a wheel mouse. referred to as shape handles. press and hold CTRL. When drawing or modifying a building model. Small blue dots.

to lengthen the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. require two clicks to complete the command. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.15 Click and drag the left control. and on the Edit toolbar. click to specify the starting position. After selecting the element to be moved. for example. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Some commands. In this case. click (Move). Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. such as Move and Copy. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. and click again to specify the ending position. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 .

All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Select the plant. 23 On the Undo menu. Move. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. as shown. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. In this example. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. select the second item in the list.20 Click next to the lower wall. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and drag it on top of the table. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the drop-down menu next to .

click Lines. Some commands. 26 To end the command.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. on the Standard toolbar. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. such as the Lines command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. click the Undo command. click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. If the grid moves.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. As you develop the building design. For example. the wall or column will move with it. a curtain wall. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. 25 . or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a central service core. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. it is good practice to test the constraints. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model.

After the beginning exercises. such as a door or window. from the product library. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. In practice. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. you load any required family type that is not in your project.

reflected ceiling plan views. and click Browse. and settings.Creating the Project In this exercise. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. 3 Under Template file. The new project opens. with an RVT extension. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. levels. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. expand Floor Plans. you design inside the elevation markers. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. In views that display elevation markers. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. you use a template that is provided with the software. These views are customizable: you can rename them. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. but contains no geometry. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 5 Click OK. and residential. and elevation views created in the project by the template. sheets. construction. For this project. schedules. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. change their properties. Creating the Project | 27 . Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. West. select Project. and customize the project as necessary. To create the project file. verify the second option is selected. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. and delete them. In the drawing space in the right pane. under Create new. duplicate them. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and Elevations (Building Elevation). East. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Ceiling Plans. views. you will use the default template. 2 In the New Project dialog. notice four elevation markers. The project is stored as a single file. click Training Files. locate the Project Browser. South. expand Views (all). and families in your project.rte. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. 7 If necessary. NOTE If you create a project without a template.

created by the template. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. double-click South. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Schedules/Quantities. After you modify the two default levels. will be accessible from the Project Browser. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and other properties. You change the names of the 2 default levels. 16 Click Save. 15 For Save as type. you will want to save your work frequently. the view you see in the drawing area. Sheets (all). Two level lines. 10 In the Project Browser. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). display in the south elevation.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Families. and duplicate levels.8 Under Floor Plans. delete. 13 In the file window. heights. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. view the Save Reminder interval. as well as change their names. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. You can add. As you design and document your building model. and click Training Files. such as schedules and legends. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. Groups. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. enter Revit Retail Building. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work.rvt) is selected. and on the General tab. notice the Legends. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. double-click Metric. content and building model reports. 14 For File name. verify Project Files (*. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

and press ENTER. and press ENTER. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. doors. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. or constrained. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. and windows within the building model. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. Adding Project Levels | 29 . enter -1800 mm. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser.You learn how the levels are locked. so that when one level moves. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. enter 0 mm. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. 5 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. enter 01 Entry Level. and double-click South. When you begin designing. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. to each other. the other levels move and change with it. enter 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. expand Views (all).

you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. As you move the cursor. By default. 14 Click Plan View Types. click Rename. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and press ESC. and enter 02 Level. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. and click Basics. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. When you add the new level. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 23 On the Options Bar. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. which should display by default. verify and Make Plan View are selected. This is the Options Bar. right-click Level 3. 19 Click OK.Next. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. Next. right-click. and for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. and then move it up. you add another level. under Floor Plans. click . view the Design Bar. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. not all the tabs are visible. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. and move it slightly upward. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. and click OK. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. If it does not. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. 16 Enter 3750 mm. click Level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. using a different option. enter 3750 mm. 21 In the Project Browser. click Level. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Adding Project Levels | 31 . the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created.25 Click to place the level line. and rename the corresponding views. click Modify to end the command. 27 Press ESC. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. or on the Design Bar. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. If you create a level by copying it. as shown. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level.

and specify the grid line endpoint. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. under Floor Plans. By using the grid to control placement of columns. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. the column height changes as well. all the levels move. so that if the roof elevation changes. In the following exercise. In a later exercise. click Modify. click Grid. Notice that by moving the top level. and you can move them independently. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. the levels are no longer constrained. If you select a level and click its lock. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. specify a start point for the grid line. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. 3 On the Options Bar. select . “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Move the cursor up. On the Design Bar. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. When the grid is complete. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model.

Creating a Column Grid | 33 . use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. and click to place the line. On the Options Bar. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and for Offset. for Offset. click Grid. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Click to place the grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. for Offset. Next. enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. enter 7500 mm. Enter A. and press ENTER. enter 4500 mm. and click to place the line. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. click . Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C.

as shown. click Dimension. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click Grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click Grid. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. 11 On the Design Bar. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. On the Options Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.8 Press ESC. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm.

click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 21 Press ESC. 24 Press ESC. The pins are hidden.14 On the Options Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. and press ESC. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click . you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. until it is closer to grid line A. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. Two pins display on the grid lines. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. By pinning these central grid lines. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. until it is closer to grid line 5. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . 22 While pressing CTRL. and select grid line A. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. click and drag the blue circular grip up. select grid lines C and 3. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 18 On the Design Bar. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click Dimension. 15 Starting with grid line A. and press ESC. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify.

adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 36 On the Standard toolbar. under Floor Plans. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. click Activate Dimensions.■ If necessary. 31 Press ESC. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. If it is unlocked. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and unlock it. 40 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 35 Enter 9000 mm. 34 On the Options Bar. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. select all of the column grid lines. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. and press ENTER. select 01 Entry Level. For Place By. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. click Structural Column. lock it. Next. 27 In the Type Selector. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. select grid line A. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 33 While pressing CTRL. click (Grid Intersection). for From. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. click Camera. click Finish. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines.

and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 37 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

45 Proceed to the next exercise. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . enter To Building. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. named 3D View 1 by default. The current view. “Adding Beams” on page 38. 44 Save the drawing. In the Rename View dialog. displays in bold under 3D Views. and click OK. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. under Views (all). Adding Beams In this exercise. expand 3D Views. and click Rename.

6 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. The view is currently set to Coarse. 10 In the Project Browser. select each grid line. 8 While pressing CTRL. the icon on the right side of the scale. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area.When you finish adding beams. under 3D Views. click Grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. 7 On the Options Bar. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. view the icons on the View Control Bar. Adding Beams | 39 . click Finish. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 4 Click Medium. click Beam. The selected grid lines display as red. under Floor Plans. 3 Click the Detail Level icon .

The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. select 06 Roof. click Modify. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. When you created the columns. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. which only extend to the 5th level. 13 On the Design Bar.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. double-click 01 Entry Level. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. and click Select All Instances. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. right-click. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. press and hold SHIFT. select 02 Level. 14 Select one of the beams. 12 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. under Floor Plans.

25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 20 Click Cancel. 21 With the column selected. resize the view to see the entire structure. and click Select All Instances. click . under Instance Parameters. All of the columns display as red. for Top Level. under Constraints. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. Adding Beams | 41 . The columns now extend to the top level of the building. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 22 On the Options Bar. 06 Roof. and if necessary. right-click. select 06 Roof. double-click To Building.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 24 Press ESC. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. right-click. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. but it would only change the height of the single selected column.

Click Detail Level. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 Proceed to the next exercise. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. under Elevations. double-click South. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. and click Coarse. area. but want to display them in less detail. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. 28 Save the drawing. “Adding Braces” on page 43. as lines only. and click Hidden line.

and press ESC to end the command. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click the elevation marker arrow. verify Attach to Grid is selected. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Adding Braces | 43 . double-click 00 Foundation. you create 8 framing elevation views. To better add the braces to the structure. click Framing Elevation.Adding Braces In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 3 On the Options Bar.

click Brace. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 11 Using the same technique. press ESC. but when placed the braces are placed. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 7 On the Design Bar.The associated framing elevation view displays. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. click to specify the start point of the brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. After you add the final brace. 8 In the Type Selector. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown.

The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 45 . Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. and press ENTER.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm.

double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. and press ENTER. but this time add them from right to left. under Floor Plans. click twice to restore the original level heights. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 21 Select grid line A. and press ENTER. 19 In the Project Browser. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 10000 mm. and on the Options Bar. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). under Floor Plans.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 14 On the Standard toolbar. enter 12000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. as shown in the 3D view below. double-click 00 Foundation. click Activate Dimensions. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B.

under 3D Views. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. beams. 31 Save the drawing. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. under Elevations. double-click 3D. lock it. Creating a Foundation | 47 . 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. double-click 00 Foundation. and roof height. 26 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click South. grid size. 24 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Standard toolbar. Test connectivity of the columns. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. and drag it away from the structure. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move.23 In the Project Browser. and if necessary. under Floor Plans. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. under Floor Plans. and how to load specific families into a project. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Click OK twice. double-click 00 Foundation. click Training Files. expand Families. and expand Structural Foundation. for Level. In the Element Properties dialog. and press ESC. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project.Before you can add the pile caps. In the View Range dialog. and drag it to the drawing area. The pile cap has been added in the view. click Edit. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. A warning displays. and click View Properties. for View Range. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. under View Depth. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. select Unlimited. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. under Extents.rfa. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Close the warning dialog. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. After you load the pile cap family. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. The foundation pile cap now displays.

12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. press ESC.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. under 3D Views. 13 In the Project Browser. and click Create Similar. When the final pile cap is placed. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. Creating a Foundation | 49 .

click Training Files. 4 On the Design Bar. All of the columns in the building model display as red. double-click 3D. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. You load new column. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. you change the types of the columns. click Modify. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and brace families into the project. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog. beam. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. 3 In the Type Selector. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure. 2 Select one of the columns. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. and click Select All Instances.5CHS. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. View the round hollow columns in the building model. beams. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. under 3D Views.

click Modify. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and changing its size parameter. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. 19 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click Modify. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. click Brace. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . the braces as well as the beams change. enter 75 mm.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. In the following steps. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. right-click. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 While pressing CTRL. click . enter 75 mm. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. 13 In the Name dialog. for d. for Type.6x15. 6 In the Type Selector. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. 18 In the Type Selector. and click Select All Instances. double-click Elevation 1-a. This not the size that you want to use. click . under Dimensions. 7 On the Design Bar.2x101. select the braces in the elevation one by one. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. 9 In the Type Selector. The brace type changes. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. you change the brace type. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.9.

“Adding Floors” on page 52. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. Some other Revit Architecture elements. stairs. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 01 Entry Level. and elements in the current view display as gray. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. click Floor. under Floor Plans. and railings are also created from sketches. To create floors. ■ On the Sketch tab.rvt. Adding Floors In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. click Training Files. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. You are now in the sketch editor. such as roofs.

and then the 1st horizontal grid line. Leave this dimension unlocked. past the first vertical grid line. If the grid changes size. At the top left corner of the grid. Adding Floors | 53 . click .■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Dimension. Move the cursor to the left. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. as you resize it in the next steps. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select the top floor line. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. Do not lock the dimension. Using a crossing window. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension.

click Finish Sketch to create the floor. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Quit Sketch. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. using a different sketching technique. They display on the floor sketch.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. At the top left corner of the grid. 7 On the Design Bar. Enter 300 mm. Next. on the Design Bar. press ENTER. click . this is how you would do it. Move the cursor to the right dimension. select the top floor line. 8 Select the floor. and on the Options Bar. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. Select and lock the dimensions. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. click Modify. and click the temporary dimension value. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. and change their values to 300 mm. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. and then press ESC. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry.

click Lines. The 02 Level floor displays. 14 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. enter 1500mm. click Floor. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and for Offset. double-click 02 Level. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. click Finish Sketch. Select the three remaining floor lines.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. click . Adding Floors | 55 . On the Sketch tab. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. and lock the dimensions. The 02 Level floor sketch displays.

20 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. click Floor. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 03 Level. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Lines. click . 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Align . and a lock icon displays. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line.

39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. and click OK. Alternatively. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. double-click {3D}. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. 38 In the Project Browser. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. Adding Floors | 57 .24 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the floor. click Model Graphics Style. under Floor Plans. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. under Floor Plans. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 40 Select grid line A. and enter 4500 mm. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. click Finish Sketch. 35 On the Design Bar. and unlock it. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and lock the edges. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click 01 Entry Level. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select 05 Roof Garden. and click Activate Dimensions. 37 On the View Control Bar. under Views ➤ 3D Views. click Edit. 31 In the Project Browser. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. and click Shading with Edges.

43 On the Standard toolbar.42 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. under 3D Views. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. double-click 00 Foundation. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. 44 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Roof In this exercise. double-click {3D} to view the grid.

5 Move the cursor over grid line E. 3 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. or the perimeter. under Floor Plans. When a green dashed line displays. enter 1800 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. ■ ■ For Offset. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope.To create the roof. You sketch the footprint. Click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. and press ENTER. Adding a Roof | 59 . of the roof in a plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. double-click 06 Roof. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click to place the roof line. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. and when the green dashed line displays. click to place the roof line. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. and lock it. click (Trim/Extend). enter 0 mm. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line.6 Select grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. and lock it. 10 Press ESC. For Offset.

View the roof 19 On the View toolbar.00. click . for Slope Angle. 17 Select the roof. and on the Options Bar.12 Optionally. Adding a Roof | 61 . 13 On the Design Bar. click . place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. click . and click OK. double-click 06 Roof. click Finish Roof. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. enter 4. under Dimensions. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans.

8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . click Duplicate.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. so if you resize the grid. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. the curtain wall resizes with it. When you duplicate a type. for Spacing. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK twice. for Join Condition. 6 In the Name dialog. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. for Spacing. 3 In the Type Selector. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select Curtain Wall: Storefront. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. click 01 Entry Level. enter 1050 mm. enter 2100 mm. Under Construction. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK.rvt. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. for Type. you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. click Wall. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Edit/New. enter Retail Storefront. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. click Training Files. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. The type is saved in the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click (Trim/Extend). These dimensions are not in a sketch. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 .■ ■ ■ For Level. select 05 Roof Garden. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. enter 600 mm. and move it slightly toward the building interior. If you want to hide them. For Offset. 10 When a green dashed line displays. and lock the dimensions. and trim each curtain wall segment. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. so they remain in the view. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. you can delete the dimension. If the grid moves. 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. For Height. select 01 Entry Level.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Hidden Line. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click To Building. Click Model Graphics Style.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser.

clear one element to clear all the elements. and click None. under the element list. 4 On the Model Categories tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Medium. click All. To better work with the curtain wall panels.Creating an Entrance In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Views (all). All the elements in the list are selected. 5 Under Visibility. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns.rvt. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. and double-click South. 6 Under Visibility. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Training Files. Creating an Entrance | 65 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Do not select Columns. in the Type Selector. click Modify. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. select System Panel: Solid. select Architectural Elevation. 12 With the panels selected. 7 Click OK. press and hold CTRL. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 10 Select 1 panel. 9 On the Design Bar. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. and click OK.

under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. Creating an Entrance | 67 . in this case an architectural elevation. double-click To Building. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected.16 On the View Control Bar.

22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. double-click South. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and click to select it. 24 On the Options Bar.20 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. select another mullion to the right. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Add or Remove Segments. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. Creating an Entrance | 69 . 34 On the View toolbar. and unpin it. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. click . click Modify. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and view the new entrance. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass.27 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select One Segment.

36 Zoom in to the first panel. 39 Using the same process. select it. 3rd. and unpin it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and 4th panels. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 38 Press DELETE. press TAB until it is selected.

40 Optionally. double-click 01 Entry Level. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. under Floor Plans. for Underlay. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Right-click in the view. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click OK. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. under Graphics. and click View Properties. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. select 02 Level. open the North elevation. 1 In the Project Browser. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 Select the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. click Callout. and specify a point to complete the callout. which indicates you must draw the callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the grip closest to the callout head.

right-click. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. click Section. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Flip Section. and click Rename. 12 Draw a section line. enter Display Area. 13 Select the section line.9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 16 Select the section box. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. Move the cursor horizontally to the left. under Floor Plans. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and specify a point past grid line D. 14 Press ESC.

and click OK. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. 26 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. and lock the dimension. 27 On the Options Bar. right-click Section 1. For Loc Line. 25 Press ESC. enter Section Display Area. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor.17 In the Project Browser. Lock both alignments. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . and click Rename. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. expand Sections (Building Section). under Floor Plans. click (Align). and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. click Dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). select Wall faces. Click . 19 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension. for Prefer. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Project Browser. click Ceiling. 32 In the Type Selector. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. double-click 01 Entry Level. 18 In the Rename View dialog. select Finish Face: Exterior. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. under Ceiling Plans. click Wall. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. and click to select the walls. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . 39 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). 37 On the Design Bar. double-click Section Display Area. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. 36 Press ESC. click .■ Click Click . The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. 41 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. .

Select the 02 Level Floor.42 In the Element Properties dialog. for Base Offset. 44 Select the ceiling. select a grid line. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 2700 mm. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. click Move. for Height Offset From Level. click Modify. and click OK. and click to select the walls. press TAB until you select the wall chain. and click OK. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. To position the grid. and click . under Ceiling Plans. On the Options Bar. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Constraints. 47 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. enter 2700 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. for Top/Base. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. on the Tools toolbar. click Attach. and specify a distance. under Constraints.

Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Edit. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Cancel. click (Rotate). under Construction. 53 Click OK. 55 In the Element Properties dialog.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Cancel. and click . 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . for Structure. view the ceiling structure. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. 57 On the Options Bar.

61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. and press ENTER. 60 Press ESC. enter 45. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .59 Click.

you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. 64 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click To Building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 .View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. 63 On the View Control Bar. and then copying it to the 05 Level. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. click Shadows Off. click Shadows On. under 3D Views. 65 Optionally.

You will create the stair in the area between these columns. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. 3 On the View Control Bar. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. and 3. Move the cursor vertically. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. 2.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Ref Plane. C. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B.

and specify a point to create first stair flight.■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 . click Stairs. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane.

11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and specify a point.225mm Masonry. select Finish Face: Interior. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. The complete stair displays. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. 8 On the Options Bar. click Align. including its handrails. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. and lock the alignment. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Move the cursor down. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. beyond the end of the stair. select Basic Wall: Generic .■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 9 On the Design Bar. 16 Using the same technique. Click . and select the 2nd reference plane. 10 In the Type Selector. click Wall. and click to select it.

21 Select the stair. select Wall faces. Select the bottom of the stair. and press DELETE. Because the dimension is constrained. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. enter 1200 mm. Select the interior face of the wall. select the dimension value. and specify a point away from the wall. select both reference planes. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 22 On the Standard toolbar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . Select the wall. 19 Select the dimension. The stair and walls move to the left. click .17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 While pressing CTRL. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. and press ENTER. for Prefer. click Dimension. Lock the dimension. and press DELETE. a warning displays. Click Modify.

84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . TIP To flip the door swing. 25 In the Type Selector. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. Click OK. click Door. clear Tag on Placement. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. For Top Constraint. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. select all 4 walls. and move the cursor to spin the building model. Click OK. click 34 On the View toolbar. 33 On the View toolbar. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. Under Constraints. select 00 Foundation. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. but if you view the top level of the building. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. for Base Constraint. 35 Press SHIFT. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . and click . 31 Select the stair. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 29 While pressing CTRL. for Multistory Top Level. 28 On the Design Bar. press and hold the left mouse button. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. click . 26 On the Options Bar. . select 05 Roof Garden. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. click Modify.

38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. and lock the alignment.Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 41 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. . 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. click Align. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. and lock the alignments. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . under Floor Plans.

. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and spin the building so you can see the roof. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar.49 In the Select Levels dialog. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. click 51 On the View toolbar. and click OK. By offsetting the base. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. click . 55 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. ■ For Top Constraint. for Base Offset. under Floor Plans. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. . Under Constraints. enter 300 mm. 52 In the Project Browser. click 56 On the View toolbar. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. click . and click OK. 53 Select the shaft. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 . click Training Files. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. 59 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise.58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.

10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. 2 Right-click in the view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select 06 Roof. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.225mm Masonry. and click View Properties. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. Select the dimension value. for Loc Line. Select the wall. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 5 In the Type Selector. for Underlay. Enter 1050 mm. click Wall. select Basic Wall: Generic . 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 05 Roof Garden. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. under Floor Plans. click Dimension. select Core Face: Interior. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Graphics. and press ENTER.

click Lines. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. and click to place a line. 15 Select the wall. 23 Press ESC. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. The South elevation displays. click Edit Profile. and click to place a line. move the cursor up 6000 mm. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . 19 Press ESC. click (Align). 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. move the cursor up 4500 mm.11 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. click Lines. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. double-click Elevation: South. and on the Options Bar. 16 In the Go To View dialog. and then select the right face of the wall. 20 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. and click to place a line.

Select the short right profile line. snap to the top of the circle. Select the top right portion of the circle. and select it. Select the top right portion of the circle. Select the top horizontal profile line. 32 Click Modify. click (Trim/Extend). 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. Press ESC. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. click .24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and click (Circle). 29 On the Options Bar. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. click Lines. 27 Press ESC. 31 Move the cursor to the left. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. and click to place it. 28 On the Design Bar.

click Lines. 47 Click Cancel. By adding extra height to the wall. and click to place it. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. unlock it. 35 On the Options Bar. 42 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. 40 On the Design Bar. click Continue. click Modify. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. and press DELETE. note that for Top Constraint. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. click . click Modify. 37 On the Design Bar. select the short horizontal line on the right. 43 In the Warning dialog. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. click Finish Sketch. click the Close button. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . 39 In the Error dialog. 38 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. and select the wall. instead of lengthening the existing edge.34 On the Design Bar. you maintained the relationship to the roof level.

Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . You learn how to load these components into the project.49 On the Standard toolbar. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. double-click 3D. under 3D Views. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. click to restore the original height of the roof. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. and how to place and adjust them in project views. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

between grid lines C and D. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter. click Training Files. 3 In the Type Selector. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. as shown. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Component. TIP After you place the 1st planter.

and in the Type Selector. click Edit/New. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. under Floor Plans. enter 1500 mm. under Floor Plans. 17 Click Apply. 11 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. click . click . 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 In the Name dialog. 10 View the roof. double-click {3D}. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. under 3D Views. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Plant Height. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.5. 18 While pressing CTRL. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Component.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. select Tree .5 On the Basics tab. and then click OK twice. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. double-click 01 Entry Level. select M_Tree . and click OK. 12 Select 1 of the trees. 8 On the View toolbar. select the 2 remaining trees. under Other. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. for Type.5 Meters. 19 In the Project Browser.5 Meters. and press ESC. enter Cornus Florida 1.

21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to sketch a line. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . 22 On the Design Bar. enter 2400 mm. for Offset. click Lines. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to place the line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. ■ ■ For Offset. 26 Using the same method. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. click Floor. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to sketch a line. 27 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm.

and click to finish the line. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and click to finish the line. 35 Select the line that you just drew. click . 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. The completed sidewalk displays. click Finish Sketch. 31 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor up 900 mm.30 On the Options Bar. clear Chain. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 34 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.

45 Click OK. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. select M_RPC Male: Alex. 48 In the Type Selector. enter Sidewalk. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. near Column E5. 53 In the Type Selector. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . RPC people are represented by a circle. 43 Click OK twice. click Component. create a new type for the sidewalk element. select Rotate after placement. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. In plan view. 39 Select the sidewalk. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 42 In the Name dialog. as it is currently a floor element. enter -250 mm. 49 On the Options Bar. for Type. click Edit/New. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. click Duplicate. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.Next. click . The circle is divided in half by a line. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. for Height Offset from Level.

under Constraints. double-click West. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 57 Press ESC. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. enter -300 mm. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 64 Select Cathy. 55 In the Type Selector. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 60 In the Element Properties dialog. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). Next. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. for Offset. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. click the car. under Elevations. click Pick Host. and click . click Camera. and on the Options Bar. 61 In the Project Browser. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. When you select a host for a component. select M_RPC Beetle.

68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . 71 Proceed to the next exercise. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. and replace them with a service core. double-click To Building.65 Click the sidewalk. 67 Click the sidewalk. and on the Options Bar. 69 Using the same method. If the sidewalk changes height. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. 66 Select Alex. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. click Pick Host.

After the service core is linked to your project. under Floor Plans. you delete the entire stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. including the stairs. and press DELETE. . double-click 06 Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the entire stairwell. and spin the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. click . you must cut another shaft opening around it. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click 5 On the View toolbar. press SHIFT. click Training Files. so it will cut through the floors of the building.rvt. 4 On the View toolbar. and shaft opening. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. walls. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof.

Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . Select Cursor at center. under Floor Plans. select m_RRB_link. Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. and then select the top horizontal core wall. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place.rvt. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. The building service core displays in your drawing. 9 In the Metric folder. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Align). click Training Files.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 11 Click Open. 10 At the bottom of the dialog.

click Finish Sketch. for Base Offset. click . click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. click . 17 On the Options Bar. select Chain. Click OK. select Up to level: 06 Roof.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 300 mm. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. click 24 On the View toolbar. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. For Top Constraint. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines.

in the Project Browser. expand Renderings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. and double-click Lounge Perspective. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. and open Metric\m_Conference. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. 3 In the new project. press SHIFT. where it is hosted within a railing family. click Training Files.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. The rendering displays. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. After you modify it. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you add glass railings around the floor edges.. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

press and hold CTRL. Handrail only. click Edit. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. and click to split the floor. click (Split). 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . expand Families. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays.rvt. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and Parapet. double-click 02 Level.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Modify. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 5 Expand Railing. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The floor sketch displays. 12 Select the floor. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and expand Railings. click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. and select Glass. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.

22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click the lock to lock the alignment. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click to draw another line. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. click . and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. click Lines. and click to place it. 26 Select grid line D. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. click (Align). 25 Select grid line B. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . and lock the alignment.18 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click .29 On the Design Bar. for Type. For Offset. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. enter 100 mm. click Dimension. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference.rvt project. click Railing. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 33 On the Design Bar. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 31 In the Revit dialog. Lock the dimensions. select Glass. click Railing Properties.

View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.39 Click Finish Sketch. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. You can view the railing that you just added. click Camera. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 .

■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 Close all project drawings.

exterior fire stairs. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. 109 . As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. and a roof garden. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. lofty ceilings. balconies. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse.

NOTE For training purposes. slight modifications to the building design have been made. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects .

section. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. including plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 .Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial.

You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.Creating Views In this lesson. you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing views. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to create section and elevation views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.

select Level 2.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . and click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. Next. and click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 11 Under Floor Plans. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. click the current scale. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.16 Right-click. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 . you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. select Elevation: Building Elevation. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 4 On the Options Bar. click Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. under Floor Plans. select1:100. double-click Level 1.

Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. double-click South East. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. enter South East. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and click OK. under Elevations.

and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down. select 1:100. for Scale.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. under Views (all). click Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Building Section. and double-click Level 1. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . Click the midpoint of the section line. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

23 On the View Control Bar. click Modify.21 On the Design Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. expand Sections (Building Section). 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . click Modify. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. To create each view.rvt. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Creating Callout Views | 121 .

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans. select 1:50. and specify a point to complete the callout. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. for Scale. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select the callout boundary. click Callout. select Floor Plan. 4 On the Options Bar.

and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.■ Select the middle grip. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Creating Callout Views | 123 . click Modify.

12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 13 In the Type Selector. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). click Callout. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. select 1:50. select Detail View: Detail. for Scale. double-click Section 1. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser.

under Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the Project Browser.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 125 . enter Roof Overhang Detail.

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. . The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays.rfa. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Section Tail . and click OK. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. scroll to Section Line. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the floor plan. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . click the Annotation Objects tab. Section Tail – Filled. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. 8 In the Name dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. click Edit/New. click Load into Project. clear any others. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. select Section Head . select Custom-Section Head. and can be applied to the section line. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. for Section Head.Custom. 12 For Section Tag. select the current project. open Metric\Families\Annotations.Filled. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. select the section line. and click Open. click Duplicate. and click OK. 15 Under Category. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.rvt. and click OK. click Training Files. and click OK twice.

On the floor plan. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. clear all others. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Duplicate. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 19 Click OK. enter 12. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. select Custom-Callout Head. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. scroll to Section Marks. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 27 Click OK twice. notice the square elevation markers that display. select 3. select Square. select the current project. .5 mm. click Edit/New. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. for Elevation Tag. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Load into Project. and select 2. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. For Line Weight. select 12. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the floor plan. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. and click OK. Click OK. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays.5mm Square. 30 On the Design Bar.rfa.5mm Square. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Training Files. enter 12. and select 3. and click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. 17 Under Category.

click Duplicate. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. select the callout. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. For Corner Radius. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 49 Click OK. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. and select 7.33 In the Type Properties dialog. for Callout Tag. and select 4. 36 In the drawing. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. expand Callout Boundary. 34 In the Name dialog. select . select Dash. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 40 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. enter 6 mm. 39 Click OK twice. 43 Under Category. click Edit/New. click the Annotation Objects tab. enter . 46 Under Category. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. . 45 For Line Pattern. Click OK. scroll down to Callout Boundary. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog.

click Training Files. The crop region displays as red. masking regions. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and double-click East. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a View Template In this exercise. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. filters. To accomplish this. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and apply it to multiple elevation views. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. view regions. under Elevations. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. You learn to create view templates.rvt. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and visual overrides. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser.

12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. under Visibility. 8 Click OK. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Under Visibility. 4 On the Design Bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. clear Entourage. under Extents. right-click East. 5 On the View Toolbar. and click Properties. under Elevations. clear Crop Region Visible.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 6 On the Project Browser.

and section lines are now hidden in the view. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 18 In the View Templates dialog. elevation markers. under Elevations. grids. click Apply. 15 On the View Control bar. and click Create View Template From View. 20 In the Project Browser.14 Click OK. 16 In the Project Browser. Callouts. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and click OK. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. under Elevations. levels. click OK. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North. 17 In the New View Template dialog. right-click North. right-click East. 19 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation.

23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Edit.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. and click Properties. for Bottom. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. select Level Below (Level 4). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Level Below (Level 4). double-click Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. for Level.rvt. right-click. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Extents. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . Under View Depth. 2 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. under Floor Plans. for View Range.

8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for View Range. select Level 4. for Bottom. click Edit. select Level 4. Under View Depth. Click OK twice.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. double-click Roof Plan. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Roof Plan. right-click. under Extents. for Level. 6 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. Click OK twice. for Level. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . select Unlimited. 13 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. for View Range. Move you cursor diagonally. click Finish Sketch. Under View Depth.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In the left corner of the building. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. click Lines. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for Bottom. select Unlimited. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 17 On the Design Bar. under Extents. click Plan Region. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Region Property.

8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Views (all). you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. select Walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click the Filters tab. in this case. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Categories.rvt. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. click (New). Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. select Fire Rating. 7 In the Filters dialog. click Edit/New. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. expand Floor Plans. the fire rating of the walls. and click OK. After you apply the filter. enter Rated Walls. 5 In the Filters dialog. under Filters.

16 Click OK. 17 Using the same method. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Remove. 9 Click OK. for Rated Walls. for Color. click Add. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Basic colors. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. under Projection/Surface. 12 On the Filter tab. To accomplish this. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. click OK. click No Override. click Override under Patterns. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Solid Fill. for Pattern. Enter Hr. and click OK. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. select the red color.■ ■ Select contains. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . 10 On the Filter tab. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 14 In the Color dialog. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time.

5 On the View menu. and click Rename. right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. as shown. and click OK. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Show Crop Region. 4 On the View Control Bar.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

9 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Masking Portions of a View | 139 . 12 On the Options Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. select Invisible lines. 8 Select the crop region. click Masking Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.7 On the View menu. 11 In the Type Selector.

15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click Finish Sketch. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Unit 18 Plan . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.rvt. under Floor Plans. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.14 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan.

under Visibility. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. and click Override. and click 1: 50. for Color. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click the current scale. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Walls. 4 On the View Control Bar. click in the Patterns field. right-click. and click Rename. under Pattern Overrides. 7 Under Cut. click No Override. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. for Pattern. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Solid fill. 11 Click OK twice. right-click. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click black. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 .

Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Floors. click Modify. clear Grids. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. 12 On the Design Bar.

18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

By using the previous method to make the selection. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. select a bright green color. 25 Click OK twice. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. under Lines.20 Right-click. 28 For Color. select the sofa. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click No Override. click By Category Override. 23 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. click a purple color. click Override. 21 Under Projection/Surface. for Pattern. select Dash. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. right-click. for Color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 29 In the Color dialog. click Projection Lines.

Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . click Modify.30 On the Design Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 32 Select one of the lamps. click . The hidden crop region is also revealed. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. right-click. click .

select A0 metric. click Sheet. and click OK. how to add views to the sheets. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.rvt.Creating Sheets. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. click Training Files. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project.

For Sheet Name. For Sheet Number.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 3 In the Project Browser. enter A101. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). enter Site Plan. click Modify. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. and select the title block. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .Unnamed. 5 When the title block highlights. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . on the Options Bar.

enter 15 May. enter For Approval. 14 Click OK. enter Freighthouse Flats. 2007. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Smith. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Client Name. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 7 On the Design Bar. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information.■ Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Project Name. enter 2007-1. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. For Project Number. under Other. click Modify. For Project Status. enter J. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Project Address. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit.

rvt. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. Adding Views to Sheets | 149 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Floor Plan. and click Save. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A106 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations A107 . select Level 1.Elevations A105 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click Rename. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. select the new sheet name. select A0 metric. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Layout Plan A104 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Floor Plan. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 17 In the Project Browser. right-click. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the sheet. double-click A102 .Stairs In the following exercise.Sections A108 . click Modify. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. under Sheets (all). for Name.

double-click A104 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser.The red border around the view no longer displays. 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. click Modify.Elevations. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). align it with the East elevation. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Select title bar. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and click OK.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. select 1:5. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). . for View Scale. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.Sections. click Modify. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and click to place it. double-click A107 . under Sheets (all).

Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. zoom in to the grip. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Stairs. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). double-click Level 1. and click to place it. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click A108 . and press TAB until it highlights. move the cursor over it. 18 Under Floor Plans.

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and then make changes and deactivate the view. double-click A107 . you must first activate the view on the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. In order to do this.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets (all).Sections. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.rvt. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 .

5 On the Design Bar. enter 16700 mm. 6 Right-click. and click Activate View. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. double-click North. and press ENTER. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. right-click. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.2 Select the building section view.

7 Place the camera as shown. and click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. enter Title Sheet. right-click. Click OK. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter T. The camera view displays.rvt. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select the new sheet name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select A0 metric. 3 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. and click Properties. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You modify the view to hide the view title. click Camera. For Sheet Name.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. After you create the sheet.

14 Under 3D Views. 13 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. Under Extents. 12 On the View Control Bar. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. for Eye Elevation. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.8 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. enter 1500 mm. select Far Clip Active. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. enter100000 mm. double-click T . Under Camera. For Far Clip Offset. 11 On the View Control Bar. For Target Elevation. enter 18000 mm.

enter Viewport/no title mark. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 25 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. for Height. select Scale (locked proportions). select No. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. under Graphics. enter 635 mm. for Show title. click Duplicate. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 24 Click OK twice. Click Apply. 22 In the Name dialog. click Modify. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Size. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. and click OK. Under Model Crop Size.15 With the view selected. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . . click Modify.

158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

You also learn to create different types of schedules. in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. such as room and window schedules. 159 . you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as doors and windows.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.Tagging Objects In this lesson. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. click Training Files. click Room Separation. and click Room and Area. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. Because of the open style floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 .4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.

The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click Modify. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and select the room tag. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 9 In the Tags dialog.7 On the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue. and click to place the room and tag. 15 On the Design Bar. click Room. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 13 On the Options Bar.rfa. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. click Modify. indicating that it can be edited. click Load. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view.

■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . Click to place the new room and tag. click Modify. 17 Click the room text label. click it. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. enter Entry. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. enter U18-1.16 Zoom in on the tag number. click Room. and press ENTER. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.

21 Click the room text label. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. 20 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Dining.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . enter Kitchen.

The rooms are already placed. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Model Categories tab. in the Project Browser. you learn how to place door and window tags. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Level 2. click Room Tag. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . clear Room Separation. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.Level 1. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. and moving clockwise.rvt. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. but they need to be tagged.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. expand Lines. 26 On the Design Bar.

4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and press ENTER.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. enter U18-1. and click OK. clear Leader. enter U18-2. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . for Mark. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. under Identify Data. click Tag ➤ By Category.

rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. 13 On the Design Bar. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. under Category. select Door Tags. and click OK.

15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 Click OK. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. expand Floor Plans. click Load. select Window. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 In the Tags dialog.rfa. click Training Files. click Tag All Not Tagged. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. and double-click Level 1. and click OK.

double-click Level 2. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. click Tag All Not Tagged. 28 Select Window Tags. 5 At the confirmation prompt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Under Floor Plans. 4 Select a dining room chair. 26 On the View toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. and modify the tag placement and display. click Training Files.Level 1. click Tag ➤ By Category. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. expand Floor Plans. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. 27 On the Design Bar. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. select Leader.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view.rfa.rvt. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Zoom flyout.

9 Click Modify. 14 Click Modify. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). and drag it above the chair tag.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 12 Click the elbow control. clear Leader. and drag it up to form an angled leader. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and on the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 Optionally. 11 Select the tag for the table.

click Tag All Not Tagged. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. and click OK. click Modify. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). 20 On the Options Bar. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. Tagging Other Objects | 171 . double-click Unit 18 Plan . 18 On the Design Bar.Level 2. under Floor Plans. and on the Design Bar.

21 In the Filter dialog. you learn to add schedules. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. and click Modify. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. and click OK. select Furniture Tags. 22 In the Type Selector. click Check None. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. in which windows are listed by window type. Finally. that is.rvt. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. click Training Files. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. Next.

click the Fields tab. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click View. 7 Using the same method. 4 For Name. select Windows. 9 Click OK. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. select Comments and click Add. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 6 Under Available fields. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . enter Building Window Schedule.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

for Sort by. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. select Type Mark. for Sorting/Grouping. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . this can be a time-consuming process. If no open view shows the selected element. and click View Properties. and on the Options Bar. NOTE By clicking Show. click Edit. in large building models with many views. and click OK twice. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. under Other. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. right-click the schedule. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. However. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click Show. expand Schedules/Quantities. you are prompted to open one that does. 13 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. click Close.

22 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and press ENTER. for Sorting/Grouping. sorted by type mark. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. double-click Level 2. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. under Other. The window type schedule is displayed. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. under Floor Plans. clear Itemize every instance. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.The window schedule is displayed.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you cannot use them to tag objects. and double-click Building Window Schedule. for Name. 5 Click OK. and sill conditions for a window can be found. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Construction. enter Head Detail. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. select Type. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. In this case. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. For Discipline. For Group parameter under.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click Add to create the new parameter. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. click OK.rvt. Under Parameter Data. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. unlike shared parameters. jamb.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields. for Fields.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and click Properties. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Group. and Sill Detail. under Other. right-click Building Window Schedule. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. Jamb Detail. click in the Head Detail header. enter Window Details. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. TIP To select all 3 headers. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Head Detail. 12 Click OK twice. under Available fields. 14 On the Options Bar. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. and while pressing the left mouse button. so that they are listed before Comments.

View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. click the Fields tab.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. 4 Click OK. 6 Under Available fields. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. You then hide the column used for the filter.Door Schedule. expand Floor Plans. Select contains in the second field. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Doors. For example. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans.Level 1. Enter U18 in the third field. enter 2/A107. and for Sill Detail. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. enter 1/A107. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. for Head Detail. click Schedule/Quantities. under Type Mark A. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. select the following fields. Verify Schedule building components is selected. enter 3/A107. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. Under Name. for Jamb Detail. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . enter Unit 18 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

Unit 18.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and double-click A102 . 13 In the Project Browser. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Unit 18 . 9 Click the Formatting tab. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 15 On the Design Bar. select Hidden Field. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 11 Under Field formatting. click Modify. expand Sheets (all). but is not included as a column in the schedule. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 10 Under Fields. select Family and Type. and drag it to the sheet. select Mark.Door Schedule. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Category. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. select Number. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 8 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 19 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. 7 To the right of Header text. under Available fields. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . select Rooms.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. and click View. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK. double-click Level 1. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. 5 Using the same method. and click Add. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan.

The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. The room Number is U17-9. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . enter Corridor. for Name. select Storage. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 103. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. for room 101. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. enter Building Entry. For 102. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. and press ENTER. enter Storage. and press ENTER. 11 Using the same method. 101-106. For 104. add 5 more rooms. select Corridor. and press ENTER. click New. next to Rows. For 105.

Under Custom colors. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room Separation. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. For Room Separation. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. double-click Level 1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. For Weight. expand Lines. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. you add room separation lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. In the Lines field. under Floor Plans. click the Lines field.rvt. select 9. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 .■ For 106. enter Stair. place rooms from a program list. and modify room names. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the bright green swatch. click the Color field. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

First.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. draw the horizontal line. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Modify. click Room. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 8 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar.

12 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. 13 For Offset. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . for Room. for Room. enter 2400 mm. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing.

as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Room Schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Place 106 in the space with the stairs. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the Corridor. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 18 In the Project Browser. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. click Modify. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Level 1.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry.

clear Room Bounding. double-click Room Schedule. and click Add. 29 On the Options Bar. and for all 3 finishes. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. and Wall Finish. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). select Rooms. while pressing CTRL. click Modify. enter Units. click New to add a new row. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. click (Properties). under Available fields. 30 For Key Name. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 .19 While pressing CTRL. 26 Select Schedule keys. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. select Base Finish. Floor Finish. and click OK. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter As Selected. The Room Style Schedule displays without data.

under Schedules/Quantities. select Rooms. 35 Click OK twice. for Fields. under Other. 39 On the View toolbar. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Room Style. 36 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. click Zoom To Fit. 32 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Room Schedule. 37 Under U17-8. right-click Room Schedule. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. Zoom flyout. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. click Room Style. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Units.31 Using the same method. and click Add. click Edit. and click OK. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click (Filter Selection). 41 On the Options Bar. click Check None. for Available fields. 42 In the Filter dialog.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. select Room Style. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. under Views (all). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. click OK. select Public. click the Color Scheme field. and click OK. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. 104. right-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. select Units. click (Properties). and 106. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and click OK.43 On the Options Bar. at the warning prompt. and click Properties.rvt. under Identity Data. 5 For Title. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . select Service. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 6 For Color. 45 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. enter Room Type. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Name. 8 Click OK. and apply it to the Level 1 view. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). select Room Type. for Room Style. and double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule. 103. 9 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. For rooms 102 and 105. enter Room Type. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click (Duplicate). and click OK. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101.

clear Visible. 22 In the Color dialog. select the color legend. and clear Room Separation. click Edit Color Scheme. select blue. click Color Scheme Legend. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. expand Lines.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Modify. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. for Display Color Fill in. and click OK. select Foreground. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. click the value in the Color column. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Custom color. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar.

(Properties). click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . enter 25 mm. 24 Click OK. 27 In the Type Properties dialog.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. on the Options Bar. for Swatch Width. enter 5 mm. click Edit/New. 28 Under Title Text. and click OK twice. for Size. under Graphics.

rvt. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. under 3D Views.29 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. click Modify. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.

13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and click Add. under Available fields. 4 In the Type Selector. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog.EPDM. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Material: Area. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.3 While pressing CTRL. Select Grand totals. 9 Using the same method. select Material: Description. select Calculate totals. 11 Click the Formatting tab. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 12 Click OK. Under Field formatting.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 5 On the Design Bar. For Then by. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Roofs. Clear Itemize every instance. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . and click OK. select Family and Type. under Category. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Modify. click Family and Type.

enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). and click Properties. and click Add. for Fields. for Name. 21 Click the Formatting tab. 23 In the Material Takeoff. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. select Calculate totals. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Material: Cost.40 50.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.80 5. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. enter Estimated Cost. under Other. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 19 For Formula. under Available fields. and click Properties. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. 22 For Field formatting. and under Fields. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Calculated Value. click Estimated Cost. for the Material: Cost field. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. 20 Click OK.

click Training Files. ensuring consistency across families and projects. under Fields. select 2 decimal places. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. 28 Click OK 3 times.rvt. you create an exiting plan for the building. and are defined and stored in an external file. click Estimated Cost. You draw a travel path line.25 In the Element Properties dialog. and schedule the total distance of each path. In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. 27 Click Field Format. adding the shared parameters to a family. regardless of category. For Rounding. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . For Units. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. creating a generic tag to tag the family. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. either within family components or within the project template. and reporting the shared parameters. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. you create a shared parameter file. tag the line. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. These shared parameters can be added to any family. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. for Formatting. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Fixed. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Edit.

Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. enter Exiting. and click OK. and click OK. for Type of Parameter. for Name. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and click OK. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Create. for File name. enter Path ID. click Training Files. click New.1 In the Project Browser. click New. enter Travel Distance. 9 Under Parameters. for Name. for Name. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click Save. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Length. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. click New.rvt. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.txt. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 11 Click OK. 7 Under Parameters. under Groups.

enter Length. under Parameters. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. 12 Click Apply. 14 If necessary.rfa. for Travel Distance Formula. and click OK. and click OK. select Shared parameter. 11 In the Family Types dialog. and select Instance. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 .rvt. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 7 For Group parameter under. otherwise the family loads into the current project. click Add. 3 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click Select. 8 Select Instance. following the equals symbol (=). click Add. under Parameters. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. If you have multiple projects open. click Family Types. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. in the Load into Projects dialog. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. group it under Dimensions. select Constraints. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. click Load into Projects. Click Training Files. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category.

and click Open. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Add. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. under Parameters. 26 On the Design Bar.rft. and click OK 3 times. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. click Modify. click Training Files. click Select.rft. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 17 Select Generic Tag. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 24 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance.

rfa. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. double-click Exiting Plan . you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Level 1. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. Placing. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. under Floor Plans.rvt is selected. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog.27 In the drawing window. 31 On the Design Bar. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. select Path ID. After the lines are tagged. and press DELETE.Tagging. for File Name. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. Placing. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.rvt. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and move it down. and click Save. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window.Tagging. 30 In the Save As dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Load into Projects. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 .

2 Zoom in to the corridor. 6 Move the cursor to the right. above the exterior door as shown. 200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Chain. 4 On the Options Bar. and click in the center of the corridor. click Component. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

select the 2 dashed travel lines. 12 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. through the door.7 Move the cursor down. under Floor Plans. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. under Constraints. click Modify. and click OK. click Component. clear Leader. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser.Level 2. Placing. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan . verify that Chain is selected. 17 On the Options Bar. and click outside of the building. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. for Path ID. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click (Properties). 13 While pressing CTRL.Tagging. enter 1-1.

22 Click at the center starting point. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Component. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. move the cursor near the right corner. and click. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click above the door to the stair.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.

32 In the New Schedule dialog.Tagging. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Category. 24 On the Design Bar. and click OK.23 Move the cursor down. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 28 While pressing CTRL. under Constraints. and click OK. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 2-1. (Properties). for Path ID. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . click Modify. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 33 For Name. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. and click in the stair. Placing.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and in the third field. click Training Files. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. and click OK twice. in the first field. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. select contains. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Schedules/Quantities. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 38 For Sort by. enter 2-. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Other. 41 Under Fields. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. enter 1-. click Schedule/Quantities. and click View. while pressing CTRL. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. for Filter by. 43 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 44 In the Project Browser. select Path ID and Travel Distance. in the third field. 42 Click OK.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Rename. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. and under Field formatting. under Available fields. for Filter. right-click the Design Bar. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Travel Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 36 For Filter by. 46 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Rename View dialog. select Calculate Totals. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 35 Click the Filter tab. 47 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. select Path ID. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. in the second field. and click Add. click Edit.

Interiors\C10 . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click C1010145 .Partitions . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 . and click Properties. select the following fields. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. expand C . and click OK. 4 Under Available fields.2 In the New Schedules dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . and click OK twice. select Walls. click the Fields tab. right-click Generic .Fixed Partitions. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. under Categories. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. and click the browse button.152 mm. click the Value field. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. for Assembly Code.

6 Click Finish. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 10 Close the exercise file. and click Next. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. select a location for the database file. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 9 Under Directories. under Database.rvt. 8 In the New Database dialog. click Create. click the File Data Source tab. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 1 On the File menu. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. Additionally. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Next. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. click OK in the dialog. click Training Files.9 In the schedule.mdb for Database Name. and click OK to create the database. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 10 When the confirmation displays. under Database Name. click OK. enter Revit_Project.

The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. in addition to the Id column. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. For example. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. 13 Close the exercise file. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 .

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial. 209 .

as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.rvt. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Relocating a Project | 211 .Relocating a Project In this exercise. click Training Files. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.

to better demonstrate how shared levels work. expand Views (all). and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. click (Properties). Under Constraints. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. and double-click South. click Edit/New. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. If you did that now. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. In the Name dialog. The south elevation is displayed. 8 Select the Level 1 line. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. 10 On the View menu. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. enter 10000 mm. By selecting the Level 1 line. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. for Elevation Base. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. However. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). enter8 mm Head . you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. and click OK. you specify the new location of the project. 3 On the Options Bar. By entering 10000 mm in this step. and press ENTER. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The levels in the project are not shared. select Shared.Shared Elevation. 6 Click OK twice.

double-click North. click Modify. as well as other views of the building model. 13 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. select Level : 8 mm Head . 14 In the Project Browser. Relocating a Project | 213 . The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. 12 In the Type Selector. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.Shared Elevation.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line.

All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. On the Design Bar. In the Type Selector. the Penthouse level. and select Levels 2-4. and the Roof Plan level. 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. click Modify.Shared Elevation. select Level : 8 mm Head .

16 If you want to save your changes. Dimensioning In this lesson.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. In this case. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. radial. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Dimensioning | 215 . expand Floor Plans. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Views (all). Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. “Dimensioning” on page 215. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. In Revit Architecture. and angular dimensions. multi-segmented. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. and save the exercise file with a unique name. permanent dimensions are created automatically. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. You place linear. and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. By default. select it. dimensions are aligned. click Dimension. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. snap to wall centerlines. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. and are created by selecting individual reference points. select it. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The lock displays as locked. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 217 . indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

for Prefer. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Wall Faces. and select it. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. and select its left exterior face. above the plan view of the building. 12 13 On the Options Bar. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. 17 Move the cursor up. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. select the right endpoint of the planter. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. select the right side of the curtain wall. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. but below the first dimension that you placed. 11 Using the same method. 15 Move the cursor to the right. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter.

Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. Creating Dimensions | 219 . click Dimension. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). and specify a point to place the dimension. select Wall faces. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.19 On the Basics tab. For Prefer. 26 Select the radial dimension. and select it. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

29 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties).28 With the dimension still selected.. and click OK. 30 On the Basics tab. on the Options Bar. click Modify. click Dimension. For Prefer. enter Typ. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Suffix. 34 Select the horizontal line. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. verify Wall faces is selected. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. 37 On the Basics tab. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. you select only the wall. and click to place the dimension. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc.

select Openings. select Entire Walls. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 3. and select Widths.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For Pick. expand Views (all). Click OK. click Dimension. expand Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. Click Options. select Wall centerlines.

“Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. click Modify. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. For example. expand Floor Plans. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. When you place dimensions. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 7 On the Basics tab. and double-click Level 1. However. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 8 Proceed to the next exercise. in some cases. and click to place the automatic dimension string. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . for a multi-segmented dimension. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall.

224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. select the right edge of the planter. and select it. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. For Pick. move the cursor down. verify Wall centerlines is selected. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. 7 Using the same method. select Individual References.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint. and select it. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . 10 Using the same method. 11 Move the cursor down. and specify a point to place the dimension.

select it.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. select Wall centerlines. and click to place the dimension. and drag the dimension down the wall. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. for Prefer. click Dimension. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. and when the wall centerline highlights.

22 On the Basics tab. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. After you create the new family type. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. click Modify. 20 Release SHIFT. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. and using the same methods. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise.19 Release SHIFT. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . 23 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 mm. click Edit/New.dimension tick mark. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. enter 3. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. for Text Size. and select the lower dimension. click Duplicate. select CityBlueprint. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. select Arrow 30 Degree. for Tick Mark. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. text font. 2 Click (Properties). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. For Text Font. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter Office Standard.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Text.

click Modify.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 10 On the Basics tab. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. 7 On the Basics tab. ■ Click OK twice. select another font. and select the bottom dimension. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard.

12 Proceed to the next lesson. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. and how to add leaders to the text notes. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building.11 Using the same method. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. select the angular dimension on the planter. create a new angular dimension type. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

click (None). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. for Leader. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . 3 On the Options Bar.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. but below the upper dimension string. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. zoom to planter near grid line 5. and click and drag to create a text box. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click Text.

8 In the Element Properties dialog box. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Text Size. and click OK. click Edit/New. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. select Arc Leaders. 7 Select the text box. 10 In the Name dialog box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. 11 Under Text.5 In the text box. click Modify. and click OK. and click OK. under Graphics. enter 6 mm. click Duplicate. enter EXISTING BUILDING. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. If so. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Modify.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . click Text. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. and enter Planting Bed. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4.

and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. In the Rename dialog. Click OK twice. Under Graphics. 20 On the Design Bar. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. for Leader Arrowhead. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. click Edit/New. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Text font. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Standard Notes. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Click Rename. select CityBlueprint. select Arrow 30 Degree.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Under Text. and click OK. for New.

click (Arc). click Text. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. over the Planting Bed text. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . click to place the text box. 26 In the Type Selector. select Text: Standard Notes. for Leader.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Wall. click File menu ➤ Save As. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 32 If you want to save your changes.31 Click in the text box. and enter 457 mm Conc. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Detailing 6 In this tutorial. 237 . you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. These components display at the required scale. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. plywood. like a standard door header condition.

you trace over the building model geometry. They are also view specific. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Detailing the View In this exercise. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. which means that all detail components. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. add detail components. After you add components. In order to detail from the building model. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the callout view. and insulation objects. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the view of the roof edge.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail.rvt. region objects. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. You load detail components. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. as well as detail lines. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.

for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and click OK. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and click Open.rfa. click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. select Corrugated Metal. click Detail Component. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 7 In the drawing area. select As underlay. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 For Spacing. enter 406. 5 In the alert dialog. Exact location is not important. 13 In the Name dialog. double-click the detail callout head. click Training Files.5mm. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Repeating Detail.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 16 Click OK twice. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 239 . 8 Delete the component. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. click Duplicate. 17 In the drawing area. The roof overhang detail displays. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

23 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. ■ Click Modify. and press DELETE. click (Move). click Modify. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 19 On the Design Bar.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Load. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component.

25 In the Type Selector. 32 To properly orient the component. Detailing the View | 241 . 34 In the Type Selector. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click OK. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. and place it in the detail view as shown.rfa. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. and click Open. click Training Files.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you load them as a group from a single file. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. Because you still have several components to load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click Training Files. and click Open. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. 31 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR 3 times.

242 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 39 Select the horizontal segment. 36 On the Options Bar.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. 38 Click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. and click Modify. select Chain. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. click Insulation. click the Flip instance arrows. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.

■ Click Modify. select to near side. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. enter 140mm. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Type Selector.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. as shown. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click (Move). select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 43 Click Modify. Detailing the View | 243 . and on the Edit toolbar. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. For Offset. click Detail Component.

Like detail components. as shown. 52 Click Modify. you add lines to your detail. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. they are view specific. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. and lock the component. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 53 Proceed to the next exercise. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. meaning they display only in this view. 2 In the Type Selector. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm.48 In the Type Selector. 4 Click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Lines. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector.rvt.

13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. For Offset. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. as shown. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . as shown. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 11 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. For Offset. click Detail Lines. enter 10mm. 10 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines.

19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. draw the detail lines as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and draw the detail lines as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 18 In the Type Selector. as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). select Thin Lines. select Chain.

select the Penthouse level line. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. When you turn the display model off.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. For Offset. and press ENTER. select Do not display. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. 22 In the Project Browser. select Vapor Barrier. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click Properties. enter 10mm. 24 On the View Control Bar. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 26 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. click Detail Component. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 32 Click Modify. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.29 On the Design Bar. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select M_Break Line.rvt. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. you add text notes to complete the detail. 30 In the Type Selector.

2 On the Options Bar. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 7 Select the dimension line. for Text ➤ Suffix. and click (Properties). enter Typ. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Adding Text Notes | 249 . and click OK. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Dimension. 6 Click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter the text. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.. Click again to specify the location of the text box.

You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. on the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. pressing TAB. and press DELETE. and save the exercise file. 7 Click Modify. select a text note. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click OK. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. right-click.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. while pressing CTRL.rvt. right-click. and selecting the chain. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing .Keynotes. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. click Select All Instances. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. click Roof Overhang Detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. select all the coping linework. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. (Filter Selection).

16 Click Modify. While pressing SHIFT. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. and the component can be placed in the detail. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Save. select the coping. 25 In the Filter dialog. 15 Use a window to select all linework. enter Roof Edge. and click Open. select Medium Lines. 18 In the Save As dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. The original linework remains selected. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. click . and click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. in the Type Selector. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Detail Component. for File name. click Load into Projects. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 14 Click Modify. clear Detail Items. 22 Click Modify. click Training Files.rft. Creating Detail Components | 251 . 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to your preferred location. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 21 To place the component. 23 Using a window.

rfa. click Load. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing .26 Press DELETE. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252.B5. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. and click Open. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. In the Keynotes dialog. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. delete the underlying linework. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Training Files. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 2 In the alert dialog. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. you place keynotes on objects. click Training Files.rfa. 31 Using the same method used previously. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 63mm Rigid Insulation. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 30 In the drawing area. and click OK. Click to place the leader arm. and click Open.

use keynote 09250. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06110. 11 Click OK 3 times.G1. FasciaProfile_1. navigate to 07645. Roof Edge4. Adding Keynotes | 253 . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. use keynote 07645. select the metal fascia with drip edge.I1. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06160. click Keynote ➤ Element. For the 50 x 200. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. For the metal coping.D1. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the 50 x 150. use keynote 06160. 6 Click Modify.F1. use keynote 06110. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. click Edit/New.C1.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.D11. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 19mm Plywood.D11. click in the Value column. 12 On the Design Bar. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.F1. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.

Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. click Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. click Load into Projects. select Medium Lines. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. click Training Files.14 On the Design Bar.A8.rvt. 18 Save the file. 22mm Corrugated Steel .20 Ga. 6 Lock the line. and click Modify. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 Keynote the component. and click Open. navigate to your preferred location. for File name.rft. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 In the Type Selector. using keynote 07460. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. select the left end point of the reference line. and select the right end point. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. select Corrugated Metal. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 9 On the Design Bar. You do this in order to keynote the component.

click Detail Component. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 25 Next. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. 18 In the Type Properties dialog.A1. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 27 On the Design Bar. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click Open. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. invisible. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 15 Click Modify. 19 In the Name dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click the end points at the top of the roof. click Training Files. and click OK. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and click (Properties). select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click Detail Component. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and hidden) used in the view. enter EPDM Membrane. click Duplicate. 31 Select the component. click Edit/New. click Load. 34 In the Name dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 29 In the drawing area. 24 While pressing CTRL. click in the Value column. 13 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 16 Select the component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.11 Press DELETE. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Edit/New. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 30 Click Modify. 28 In the Type Selector.

40 Click Modify. 52 In the Type Selector. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and click .G1.A5. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 53 On the Options Bar. and assign it keynote 06110. and click . 44 On the Design Bar. against the 3/4" plywood. name the component Air Barrier.38 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the component. click Detail Component. (Move). 48 Using the same method used previously. 49 With the component selected. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 42 Using the same method used previously. 41 Select the component just added. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. and assign it keynote 07260. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. on the Edit toolbar. and click the lower end at the break line. click Detail Component. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 46 Click Modify. click Detail Component. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select Chain.

name the component Vapor Barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. leaving the detail component lines. 50 x 200 Framing.A4. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . 58 Using the method used previously. click Keynote ➤ Element. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 61 In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07260.55 Click Modify. 60 On the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. and Vapor Barrier. Air Barrier. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.

71 Save the file. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rfa. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and assign it keynote 07210. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 68 Select the component.rfa. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. and press TAB. 67 In the drawing area. and close the text editor. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Enter 07463. add a keynote for the component. Enter 07460. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 70 In the drawing area. and click . name the component Batt Insul.A4.A9.. and press ENTER. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. 63 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 3 In the text editor. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. The database file opens in a text editor. select the component. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. 69 Using the method used previously.rvt. and press TAB. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. in the Type Selector.A1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. select Invisible Lines.txt.

click to place the leader. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. After you create a drafting view. select all the keynotes. 9 In the drawing area. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. and click to place the note. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. navigate to 07463. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry.txt. 11 Click Modify. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 14 Save the file. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . select Absolute. you learn how to create a drafted detail. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click OK. 13 Click Modify.A1. click Browse.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. and click Open. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. click Keynote ➤ Element. under Path Type. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. and click OK. under Keynote Table. These details do not update with changes to the building model. In the Type Selector. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.

and click Rename. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . for Scale. select Reference other view. select Center-to-center. click Callout. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. select 1 : 5. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. click Training Files. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. select Black and white. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area.dwg. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Layer/Level Colors. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. 3 On the Options Bar. enter EPDM Metal Coping. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. The detail that you import is in DWG format. right-click Drafting 1. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Click Open. 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).rvt.

No Reference. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rename. click Edit/New. 6 Select the callout. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 10 In the Rename dialog. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. delete the existing value. for New. enter Detail . Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Properties.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. and double-click the callout. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 12 Click OK twice. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. click Modify. 5 Click Modify. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.

Elev./Sect. and click OK.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. for Name. 3 On the View Control Bar. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . enter Header @ Sliding Door. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 18 Save the file./Det.No Reference). drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). double-click A105 . verify that the scale is 1 : 5. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail.rvt. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.

select Wide Lines. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. enter Gyp. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. and enter 20. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click Region Properties. 19 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Gypsum-Plaster. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the width dimension. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Name dialog. 18 While pressing CTRL. click Edit/New. click . click Filled Region.5mm. Draw a rectangle as shown. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 14 Click OK 3 times. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. for Name. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 17 Click Modify. . Board.

20 On the Design Bar. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. (Draw). click 22 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the mirrored region. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor up.

select Wood .Finish. select Medium Lines. in the Type Selector. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. and select the right edge of the wood region. and click OK. click Duplicate. for Name. click Region Properties. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.Finish. 30 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click (Align). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . verify that the thickness is 19mm. 37 On the Design Bar.25 Click Modify. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. enter Wood . . Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click .

46 On the Tools toolbar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 42 On the Design Bar. enter 6mm. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.38 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). click Finish Sketch. sketch the new region as shown. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing .5mm. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click Ref Plane. click (Align). 40 On the Options Bar. For Offset. and press ENTER. 39 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. click .

click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region. Move the cursor down 305mm. Select Chain. Move the cursor right 25mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . and press ENTER. For Offset. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar. and click to select the point. enter 10mm. 48 Click Modify. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend).47 Click the reference plane. Move the cursor left 25mm. and click to select the point. enter 0. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line.

65 On the Options Bar. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 61 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. and right edges of the door panel region. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Detail Component. select Medium Lines. click Load. 62 Select the left detail line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. 60 Select the left. enter 3mm. enter 76. and click Open. 58 In the Type Selector. select the height dimension. top. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. For Offset. and press ENTER. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing .2mm. click Training Files.rfa.

rfa. and click Open. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Load. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 69 Select the bolt. 71 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 70 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 68 Click Modify. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Detail Lines. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. use the images as a guide. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 76 In the Type Selector.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

(Mirror). 82 Select the rectangle. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 85 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. 84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click . and on the Edit toolbar. 80 On the Options Bar. click . select Thin Lines. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 79 In the Type Selector.78 On the Design Bar.

91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. click Detail Lines. 89 On the Design Bar. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.87 Click Modify.

click (Mirror). and click to place the arc as shown. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. and press ENTER. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. click Detail Lines. 95 On the Design Bar. click . enter 3mm. select the length dimension. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing .92 Select the line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 97 On the Options Bar. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar.

105 In the drawing area. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 102 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. and click Modify. click Detail Component. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. select M_Break Line.99 Click Modify. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.

using the Drag Text grip. 112 In the Options Bar. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 115 Select the note. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. Board. click Dimension.5mm Arial. and on the Options Bar. 110 Select the dimension line. 114 Enter Gyp. and click Modify. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.107 On the Design Bar. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Text. click to create an arced leader. 113 In the drawing area. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and click to place the text. and click Modify. select the gypsum board region on the left. 108 In the Type Selector.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 .117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 119 Save the file. 118 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 .

Creating a Note Block In this exercise.rvt. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. click Training Files. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Symbol. click Modify. click Training Files.rfa. 7 On the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.Finishing-Sheets. 5 On the Options Bar.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and double-click East.Hexagon.

enter Seal existing doors and insulate. Creating a Note Block | 279 . 13 Select the tag. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Copy). under Identity Data.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. on the Options Bar. click (Properties). 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click above the tag to place a copy. for Text. and click OK.

clear Copy. and on the Options Bar. click (Mirror). as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. enter Repair existing door surround. 20 Select the tag on the left. 16 For Tag. 17 Click OK. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building.14 With the copy selected. click (Properties). position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. enter B. and click. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 15 For Text. 19 On the toolbar. on the Options Bar. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

and moving counter-clockwise. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. for Note block name. 22 Optionally. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Repair as required. under Available fields. Select Text. Tuckpoint as required. for Sort by. Repair existing door surround. and click Add. and click OK. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and click Add. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. Saw cut existing brick wall. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Tag. click Modify. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Create. Clean exterior brick wall. enter Exterior Construction Notes. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.21 On the Design Bar. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. select Tag. using the table as a reference. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. format. Clean existing concrete loading dock.

■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 26 Click OK. enter 6 mm in the second field. 28 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and select Bold. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. enter Mark. and click Save. select Center. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. verify Arial in the first field. 27 In the column header (text). 31 On the Design Bar. for Heading. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . For Header text. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. click Modify.rvt. and double-click A103 . expand Sheets (all). select Exterior Construction Notes. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. On the Appearance tab. and for Alignment.Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser. enter Description. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. and drag it to the sheet.

On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sheet Number. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all). and click Add.rvt. enter Sheet Index. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. ■ 4 Click OK. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Sheet Number. under Available fields.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 283 . select does not equal. select Sheet Number. double-click T . for Sort by. for Filter by. in the first field. and click Add. double-click T . 6 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Index. 5 In the list title field. 1 In the Project Browser. and in the third field. Select Sheet Name. enter T. under Sheets (all). you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. expand Schedules/Quantities. in the second field. On the Filter tab. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.Title Sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. The drawing list displays.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. door frame schedule. for Name. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click New ➤ Legend. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. On construction documents. Finally. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. On construction documents.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 9 On the Design Bar. doors. windows. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. enter Typical Symbol Legend. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and click OK. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. click Modify. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and door frames. and so on). you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model.

10 For Text Size.Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and click OK twice. and click OK. click Duplicate. 6 On the Options bar. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click . enter Legend Text. 13 Working from the top down.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.Filled Level Head .Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . click Symbol. for Name. enter 3mm. you create a text type with the necessary size. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 9 For Text Font. select Arial. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. click Edit/New. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.

The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. under Sheets. select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Typical Symbol Legend. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. expand Legends. and click to place it.Unit 18. click Typical Symbol Legend. 17 On the Design Bar. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and click to place it. expand Sheets (all).■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and double-click A101 . double-click A102 .

select Section. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. and click OK. select1 : 50. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 3 For Scale. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. and press ENTER. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. for Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. enter 900 mm. click Legend Component.rvt. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 6 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . select Medium for Detail Level. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.20 In the Type Selector. For Host length. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. For View. click New ➤ Legend. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 On the Design Bar.

select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 10 Select the second wall. click Text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. for Family.9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. click to add text without a leader. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. Creating a Component Legend | 289 . 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. for Leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.13 On the Options Bar. 19 Enter the following text. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.

22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. select Level 4. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. select 4th Floor Wall Types. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. right-click Sheets (all). and drag it to the new sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. The open drawings are both visible. drag it onto the sheet. and click New Sheet. 25 In the Project Browser. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. under Legends. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. double-click Level 4. click Modify to end the command. 29 In the project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Floor Plans.

Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 291 . 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. select the Wall Type 2 component.

38 Click File menu ➤ Save. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 36 On the View Control Bar. contractor inquiries. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 37 Optionally.35 Select the patio divider wall. select Medium for Detail Level. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. These changes can be due to owner requests. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. You can create a sequence of revisions.

6 Verify that Issued is cleared. If Visible is not selected. In this exercise. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the Settings menu. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. double-click Level 4. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 .rvt. the revision is locked and issued to the field. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. In general. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. For example. or changes in building material availability. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. if the active revision is number 1. Using the table. under Floor Plans. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 5 For Description. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. In most instances. enter a date. 3 In the Revisions dialog. When Issued is selected. If you select By Sheet.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. click Revisions. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. When you use this option. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. yet as concise as possible. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. 7 Under Visible.

2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. including revision number and revision date. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 3 Select the divider. 5 Select the partition.rvt. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. you make changes to the project floor plan. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.8 Click OK. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. move the cursor up. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.6 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click near the partition you moved. click Revision Cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 11 On the Design Bar. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . 8 In the drawing area.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . you load a revision tag into the project. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. for Line Weight. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 16 Click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 6. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. click Tag ➤ By Category.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.

double-click A107 . click Tags. 5 In the Tags dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag.rfa. the cloud is tagged as number 1. you need to add one. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.4 On the Options Bar. on which you place a revised view. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Working with Revisions In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. In the Tags dialog. 10 In the drawing area. click OK. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. you prevent further changes to the revision. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Working with Revisions | 297 . You do this by issuing the revision. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. select Leader. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. 11 Click to place the tag. under Sheets.Unnamed. Because you chose to number by project. 6 Click Load. and because the revision is the first in the project. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. You then issue a revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. you create a sheet view in your project. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 8 In the Tags dialog.rvt. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. scroll down to Revision Clouds.

click Revisions. On the Settings menu. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. you can no longer modify it.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. select None for each issued revision. for Visible. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 6 In the Revisions dialog. click Revisions. and click OK. select Issued. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. NOTE After you issue a revision. click New. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You can continue to add revisions. under Add. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. Importing from Other Applications | 299 . you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. under Sheets. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. text. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.9 Click OK. into a project.Title Sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to import information from other applications. and spreadsheets. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. such as images. click Training Files.rvt.JPG. and place it on a sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Image Files In this exercise. double-click T .

7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. for Leader. 6 Select the text. click Text. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.rvt. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.doc text file in another window. click to add text without a leader. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 3 On the Options Bar. under Sheets. double-click T .5 On the Design Bar.

2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . and open Common\Fixture Schedule. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. for Name. and saved as Fixture Schedule. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.xls. click Training Files.mdi.rvt. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.Unit 18. enter Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. This step has been completed for you.JPG. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 4 Under Printer. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 5 Click OK. This process may vary from system to system. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 1 In the Project Browser.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click Modify. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. click File menu ➤ Print. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 On the Design Bar. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click Desktop. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This exercise demonstrates a common method. select the document writer. double-click A102 . 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. with the new text box still selected. and click Save. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Modify. for File name.JPG. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. under Sheets. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 10 On the Design Bar.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

The large floor plan.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. or footprint. you break up the plan into sections. called dependent views. To effectively document this project. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 303 . The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

| 305 .

and click Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. enter Level 2 . and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. under Floor Plans.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. for Name. 5 Click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 6 In the drawing area. select the crop region.Aviary. 4 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. The dependent view opens.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. and the model crop is the interior crop region.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 .

14 Click in the drawing area. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and on the Zoom flyout. 11 In the Project Browser. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 12 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 15 Select the crop region. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click OK. right-click Level 2. and click Rename. enter Level 2 . 10 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. for Name.9 On the View Control Bar.

Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. 19 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Zoom flyout. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Matchline. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 18 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . click Modify. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. and click. 24 On the Design Bar. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click A101 . 33 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. click Level 2 . select 9. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. select Double Dash. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.Unnamed. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. enter Level 2 Aviary. click the Annotation Objects tab. 28 For Line Pattern. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . for Name. for Line Weight.Aviary. 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 27 Under Matchline. expand Sheets.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Floor Plans. and click OK.

36 Use the same method to create another sheet. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. click View Reference.Aviary is selected. 39 On the Options Bar. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. for Target view.35 On the Design Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. and place the Level 2 . click Modify. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Labs dependent view on the sheet.

click Zoom To Fit. 46 In the Project Browser.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. double-click Level 2 . Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 . for Target view. under Floor Plans. click (Show Crop Region). click Modify. 41 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .Labs. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 47 On the View Control Bar.Aviary. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click the far right control. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . after modifying the annotation crop region.48 Select the crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. right-click. 49 If.

55 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. select all views in the list. 53 In the Select Views dialog. and click OK. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. under Floor Plans. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. right-click Level 2. but are not placed on sheets. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. 57 On the Zoom flyout. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 54 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Dependent Views.51 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. expand Level 1.

The dependent view opens. 5 In the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. select the Crop Region. for Name. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . enter South Elevation . and double-click South Elevation.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser.Left. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. The matchline is already placed in the view. and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog. expand South Elevation. click Training Files. right-click South Elevation.

and click Rename. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 9 In the Project Browser. enter South Elevation . click OK to accept the default titleblock. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. 11 Select the crop region. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 16 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click OK. right-click A103 Unnamed. cropping the view to the lab building.Right. for Name. enter South Elevation. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click (Hide Crop Region). and drag it toward the center of the view. cropping the view to the aviary. under Sheets. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 10 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. right-click South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region). 7 On the View Control Bar.

click Modify. under Elevations. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 23 In the Project Browser. click South Elevation . 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. under Elevations.18 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 22 On the Design Bar.Left. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . click South Elevation . click View Reference. double-click South Elevation. and drag it onto the sheet. 25 On the Options Bar.Left is selected. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. and drag it onto the sheet. 20 In the Project Browser.Right. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. for Target view.

South Elevation. select Elevation: South Elevation . click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Project Browser. for Target view.Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 .28 On the Options Bar. double-click A103 . under Sheets (all).

and click Activate View. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. Select the crop region. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Right-click the view.NOTE If the view references are not visible.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

323 . You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. More specifically. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. how to control fill pattern colors.Viewing 9 In this tutorial.

The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. You create elevations. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. including elevation and three-dimensional views. expand Views (all). TIP If the Project Browser does not display. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model.rvt. and double-click East. 2 In the Project Browser. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. you learn how to access different views of the building model. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. sections. and three-dimensional (3D) views. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. expand Elevations. locate the Project Browser. click . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. on the Standard toolbar.

click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. The default name of the view is {3D}. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. click . The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . This change is applied only to the active view. the east elevation.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 Click OK. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click Model Graphics Style. This change is applied only in this elevation view. and click Hidden Line. scroll down and clear Window Tags. 6 Under Visibility. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view.

10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . right-click {3D}. 18 In the Project Browser. 12 Press and hold CTRL. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. . double-click My 3D View. under 3D Views. The view follows the movement of the cursor. and expand 3D Views. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. 16 In the Rename View dialog. zoom. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. and click OK. and click Rename. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. click X to close the view. expand Views (all). Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser.9 On the View toolbar. click to reorient the view. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. . You can pan. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. enter My 3D View. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. Move the mouse to pan the view. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode.

and double-click Level 1.rvt.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. and click View. After you specify the second point (the view target). right-click in the Design Bar. and distance from the target. click Camera. expand Views (all). eye height. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. outside of the dimension lines. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. Cameras define the eye point. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . as shown in the following illustration. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. m_Viewing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise.

5 On the View menu. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. click Dynamically Modify View. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor up. down. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. and sideways to see how the view changes. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Change the camera position. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . 13 On the View menu. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. and target 12 On the Window menu. height. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. click Tile.

330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . under 3D Views. double-click Level 1. 15 In the Project Browser. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. right-click 3D View 1. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click Show Camera. double-click 3D View 1. 16 In the Project Browser.

17 In My 3D View. click to create a new 3D view. and move it to another location. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. right-click. Click OK. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. and click Element Properties. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . click Model Graphics Style. 20 On the View Control Bar. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. under Camera. and click Shading. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar.

25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. under Extents. 22 On the View menu. A rotation tool is also displayed. as shown in the following illustration. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and click OK. click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. A section box is displayed around the model. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 24 Click the section box.

m_Viewing_Exercise. “Creating a Section View” on page 333.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. click Section. and maximize this view. Creating a Section View | 333 . Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Section View In this exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. and rotate the section box around the model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

8 Select the section line. expand Sections. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing .3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and click Open View. select the section view. View the section 5 To view the section. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 7 In the Go To View dialog. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Modify. 4 On the Design Bar. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. or in the Project Browser. and click Find Referring Views. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. right-click. double-click the section head.

Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.9 On the Design Bar. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . click Modify. double-click Level 1. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. under Floor Plans. click Elevation. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. move the cursor around the building model. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Notice the change in section depth. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 Select the section line.rvt. double-click Level 1. Notice the change in the view direction.

a. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. 10 In the Project Browser. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.b.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. double-click Level 1. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. click Modify. Elevation 1 . 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. under Elevations. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. and click. double-click Elevation 1 . Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. 5 On the Design Bar. Elevation 1 . 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing .b.a by default. Do not select the arrow. zoom in.

and the insulation color to pink. in this case. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. and open Common\c_Showroom. In addition. such as the one below. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and applies to phasing override materials as well. For example. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. floors. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. a shade of gray. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . in a compound wall. on the File menu. This includes walls. such as Brick on CMU. where each layer is assigned a different material. click Training Files. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. and other families.rvt. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. roofs.11 If you want to save your changes. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail.

The surface pattern of the brick is black. expand 3D Views. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. expand Sections (Section Head . 4 Under Cut Pattern. Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . expand Views (all). click Materials. expand Views (all). The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. 5 In the Color dialog. 3 In the Materials dialog. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure.Brick for Name.Brick for Name. select Masonry . click Color.Level 3. select red. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. 9 In the Materials dialog. select Masonry . 2 On the Settings menu. click Materials.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing .Filled).

expand Floor Plans. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK twice. select white. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type.10 Under Surface Pattern. 11 In the Color dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. 2 On the View menu. expand Views (all). “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. and double-click Level 1. click View Properties. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Color. c_Showroom. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . The surface pattern of the brick is now white.

you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. click Detail Level. 12 On the View Control Bar. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. 10 On the Design Bar. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. By default. click Edit/New. and click Fine. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . the plan regions cannot overlap each other. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. If you create more than one plan region in a file. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. 7 In the Color dialog. click Save As. and click OK three times. . 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. and click OK. right-click. and click Element Properties. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. double-click Level 2. click Modify. select a shade of gray. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. 14 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. select Solid fill for Name.

and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. and you cannot control their visibility. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. refer to the online Help for more information.coincident edges. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. line color. or pattern. click Training Files. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. line type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model.rvt.

In the following illustration. the top and bottom clip planes. click Plan Region. the south elevation is also displayed. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. click Lines. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. expand Floor Plans. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 3 In the Level 1 view. right-click in the Design Bar. and click View. and the view depth plane. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. Plan regions have a single property. click . sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. view range. which is similar to the view range for plan views.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all).

and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. By selecting Parent View’s Level. right-click. the line turns red. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. top and bottom clip planes. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. and click Element Properties. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 4 Select the plan region. under Extents.■ ■ On the Design Bar. 8 Click Apply. 6 In the View Range dialog. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. click Finish Sketch. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. and then click OK twice. click Edit for View Range. Press ESC to end the command. When you select the plan region. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

on the File menu. 10 If you want to save your changes. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Save As. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region.

and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views. 345 . to place and render decals to create signs.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. billboards. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and posters.

After you create the perspective view. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. the floor. In this exercise. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. When you complete these changes. you select a scene that defines the model environment. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall.

Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry .Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. and click Edit/New.Brick. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Materials. verify that Co-house . and click the tab in the context menu. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.Cavity Wall . click Training Files. 8 In the Materials dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Under AccuRender. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. 3 On the Options Bar.Brick. click Wall. select Masonry . click Edit for Structure. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. under Name. under Construction. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. click . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. right-click in the Design Bar.

expand Metals. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. 26 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 11 Under Name. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. under Name. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. click Edit for Structure.200mm. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. under _accurender. 25 Under Name. and click Aluminum. 14 On the Options Bar. Polished and click OK.Running.Asphalt. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. 19 Click OK four times. select Site . You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. click Modify.Plain. 21 In the Materials dialog. and click . 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Layer 2. enter Aluminum. under Name. 24 In the Material Library. 22 In the New Material dialog. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Materials. click Duplicate. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. under Construction. under _accurender. 12 Click OK twice. select Carib. 23 Under AccuRender. 18 In the Materials dialog. select Polished. . and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. expand Masonry and click Brick.

click Edit/New. select Aluminum. 32 In the Materials dialog. click in the Material field. 33 Click OK three times. under Materials and Finishes. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. and click OK. and then click . 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Raytrace. floor. select the curtain wall mullion again. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. under Name. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. Polished. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. verify that New is selected. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 29 On the Options Bar. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. click No. click . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . 35 Move the cursor over the building model. select Exterior under Type. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.

Cnst. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . producing a photorealistic effect. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 1st Flr. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. when you render an exterior view of the model. m_Cohouse. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. In a later exercise.rvt.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. floor. 38 On the Design Bar. you place two different types of trees on the building site.

and click Site.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . click Site Component. select M_Tree . 7 In the Type Selector. select any of the deciduous trees. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. Create a new type of tree. click Modify. and click . and click Site Component. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple.9 Meters. and click to place a tree. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 4 In the Type Selector.

Black. click in the Value field for Plant Name. m_Cohouse. 10 In the Name dialog. select Oak. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and then click display the Plant Library. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. select Black Oak for Type Comments. 15 Under Other. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and place two black oak trees. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 12 In the Plant Library. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. expand Trees and Shrubs. under accurender. and click Deciduous. and click OK. 13 Under Name. under Other. and click OK. as shown in the following illustration. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. and click OK twice. under Identity Data. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. click Duplicate. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352.8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Black Oak.

Cnst. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. view open. The new perspective view is displayed.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. click Camera. Creating a Perspective View | 353 .

view. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Show Camera. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. expand 3D Views.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. double-click Exterior. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. and click Rename. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Exterior.7 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. you select a scene and specify time. place. right-click 3D View 1. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . 8 In the Rename View dialog. and environment settings that you use to render the view. lighting. date. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise.rvt. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK.

click the Solar Angles tab. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click Settings. 7 Under Date. Time. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Select By Date. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and click Sun. 8 Under Time. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. under Scene Settings.

20 for Cloudiness. 19 In the Material Library. click Environment. select Grass. click . The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. The Ground Plane tab displays. under Scene Settings. MA. and click OK. and enter bo. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.) 14 Click OK. Rye. 11 Scroll down. select Good for Quality. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 10 Click in the Cities list. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. and click OK. 26 On the Design Bar. click Image Size. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. and select Boston. select Ground Plane.9 Click the Place tab. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 18 Click Material. 16 In the Environment dialog. 17 Under Advanced. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 12 Click the Settings Tab. Dark. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Name list. under Scene Settings. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 27 On the Options Bar. 13 Enter . under _accurender.00 (many clouds. under Background Color. select Autumn for Plant Season. click No. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click Site. click Capture Rendering. 21 Click OK twice. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. USA. click Raytrace.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .30 On the Design Bar. and double-click 2nd Flr.rvt. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. on the File menu. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. and finally. Cnst. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. m_Cohouse. define the view and render scene settings. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 32 If you want to save this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Renderings. click Save As. To create the rendered scene. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.

Adding RPC People | 359 .6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 5 On the Options Bar. select Rotate after placement. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Female: Cathy.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 4 In the Type Selector. click Component. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table.

rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. m_Cohouse. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. The interior perspective is displayed. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 .

Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 229 mm for Width. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 178 mm for Height. under Size. click the dimensions for Size. and click OK.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 12 On the View menu. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. 11 On the View menu. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . select Section Box. Grips are displayed on the section box. click to display the 3D view of the building model. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. 14 On the Design Bar. and select the section box. A section box is displayed around the building model.9 In the Rename View dialog. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. click Modify. and click OK. click View Properties. enter Interior. and click OK.

select Interior. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . place. on the Main tab. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. USA. 11 Click in the Cities list. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. 14 Click Save. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and enter bo. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 4 Under Type. you create a render scene to specify the time. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and click OK. 12 Scroll down. under Scene Settings. 10 Click the Place tab.rvt. click Settings. click Environment. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. under Scene Settings. date. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Sun. MA. 7 Select By Date. Time. and enter Interior Scene for Name. 13 Click the Settings tab. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. you reduce the rendering time. select New. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and environment settings used to render the view. under 3D Views. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 8 Under Date. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 17 In the Environment dialog. under Background Color. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. By limiting the geometry. m_Cohouse. 9 Under Time. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. click the Solar Angles tab. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and select Boston. and click Save. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog.

6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. 20 In the Material Library. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view.rvt. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Radiate. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. such as windows and doors. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Summer for Plant Season. Dark. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. 21 In the Name list. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Grass. click Site. under Use View’s Section Box.18 Under Advanced. Rye. under accurender. click OK. select Ground Plane. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. click Daylights. You can select families with transparent materials. double-click Interior. Curtain Wall 1). select {3D}. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 19 Click Material. The Ground Plane tab displays. 24 Under Scene Settings. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . m_Cohouse. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 22 Click OK twice. as daylight sources. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people.The radiosity process. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. click Raytrace. which can take several minutes. on the File menu. begins. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 On the Design Bar. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. click Save As. 8 On the Options Bar. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. When radiate completes. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 Close the exercise file. 9 If you want to save your changes. . you rendered an exterior and an interior view. the following rendered view is displayed.

and change unit formats as desired. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. proceeds through the dining room. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. In a plan view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. and ends in the far corner of the living room. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you must select or define a scene. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. click Settings ➤ Project Units. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. If you prefer to use Metric values. elevation. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. The walkthrough path is a spline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. click Training Files. or section view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.

and click the tab in the context menu. right-click in the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. expand Views (all). and double-click 1st Floor. and click to specify the start point. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. click . click Walkthrough. expand Walkthroughs. or the first key frame. 3 On the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). of the walkthrough. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.

13 On the Options Bar. If it is not. 12 On the View menu. select the crop boundary. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and select the crop boundary. 9 On the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 14 Click . The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. and click OK. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 11 Under Change. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. verify Field of view is selected. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. press ESC. 17 Click . proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 1 for Frame. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. under Extents. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. click . 2 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. and click OK. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click 1st Floor. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Townhouse. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. clear Far Clip Active. The walkthrough plays.

You can move any camera target or key frame position.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. select Path for Controls. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 6 On the Options Bar.

and then click to play the walkthrough. select <Shading> for Display mode. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. If you are unsure of what option to use. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The AVI is recorded. shaded with edges. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor.7 Click the third key frame position. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 9 On the Options Bar. or with AccuRender raytracing. under Walkthroughs. specify 15 for Frames per Second. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. double-click Walkthrough 1. and click Save. 3 Under Output Length. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users.rvt. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 1 On the File menu. c_Townhouse. 2 In the Save As dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 4 Under Format. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. shaded. hidden line. When you export the walkthrough.

Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and save the exercise file with a unique name.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. specifying the number of frames. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. 8 If you want to save this exercise. reducing the size of the image. on the File menu. click Save As. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. 375 . Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. More specifically.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. In this tutorial. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

1 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View In this exercise. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and double-click 01 Entry. A 3D view is created.rvt. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. click Camera. Creating a Solar Study . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. expand Views (all). The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.

enter Solar Study . click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. 9 In the Rename View dialog.Courtyard View. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click to reorient the view. 10 On the File menu. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. under Floor Plans. as shown. you create a section cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.4 On the View toolbar. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . 6 On the Design Bar. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. if necessary. and click OK. as shown. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. double-click 01 Entry. 8 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

7 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. click . Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and click OK.3 On the Design Bar. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click 10 On the View toolbar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. 6 To view the section. and click Rename. expand Sections. double-click the section head. to reorient the view. click Section. right-click Section 1. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

to expand the dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click {3D}. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . 17 To hide the section box. as shown. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 15 In the Rename View dialog. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 14 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. then select Medium. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. including the house. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 13 On the Design Bar. and under Orient to a View. Typical plan views. double-click 01 Entry. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. then Fine. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. click Modify. you create a plan cutaway view. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. as shown.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. under Floor Plans. In some cases. do not display many elements in 3D. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Save. click Callout. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. 18 On the File menu. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. under 3D Views.

5 In the Project Browser. as shown. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. to reorient the view. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. and under Orient to a View. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Modify. 6 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Callout of 01 Entry.4 In the Project Browser. click 8 On the View toolbar. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. as shown. click . 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar.

18 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 21 On the File menu. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.15 Select the Roof. 17 On the View Control Bar. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 . under 3D Views. so you can see into the building from the top. click Save. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 16 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click Rename. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

MA. and click OK. or multi-day solar study. select Los Angeles. you specify the location. . Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. and click Duplicate. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . and time. date range. 10 Under Place. single-day. click . For the Multi-Day solar study. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and time range. 9 In the Name dialog. and double-click Solar Study . 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . USA. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. 3 Select Cast Shadows. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. leave the slider at 50. Los Angeles. for City. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. CA. For this study. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. click . Click the Single-Day tab.Courtyard View. 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. You can create a still. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. USA is selected. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. you specify the location.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. Creating Solar Studies . and click OK.Boston.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. For the Single-Day solar study. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. date.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. enter Summer Solstice. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site.

12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. Under Frame. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . ■ For Time Interval. under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. under Frame. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. on the Single-Day tab. For Time Range. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. . you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click Duplicate. select December 22. select Winter Solstice. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Los Angeles is selected. Los Angeles.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 19 On the File menu. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. enter Winter Solstice. 2006. for Date. click . click To display the next key frame. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. 16 In the Name dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Los Angeles. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click . click . 2006. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter 10 and press ENTER. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. confirm that Summer Solstice. select June 22. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 14 In this case. click Save. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . 8 On the Options Bar. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level.

2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Click outside of the text box to end the command. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Summer Solstice. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 14 On the Options Bar. The solar study animation plays. click . click To play the animation from start to finish. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Click and enter Dining.■ To display the next sequential frame. approximately as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. 13 On the View Control Bar. . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. approximately as shown. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click . Los Angeles. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . double-click 01 Entry. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . on the Single-Day tab. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.

on the Single-Day tab. as shown. expand 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 6 On the View Control Bar. select Summer Solstice. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. On the Options Bar. click . click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Lines. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. as shown. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . 11 To display the section box. Los Angeles. On the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. and click OK. select Section Boxes. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space.

as shown. For Frames per second. For Dimensions. For Save as type. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Los Angeles. select Frame range. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. enter 450 in the first field (width). enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway .12 In the drawing area. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. if necessary. 15 To hide the section box. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that Hidden Line is selected. for Model Graphics Style. On the Annotation Categories tab. To maintain the proportions of the frame. clear Section Boxes. and enter 5 to 50. For File name. Under Format. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 14 Click outside of the section box. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. select the section box. verify that the value is set to 15. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. Under Output Length. and click OK. select AVI Files. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. click Save. for Compressor. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. and enter 5 to 10.Los Angeles. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. verify that Hidden Line is selected. enter 450 in the first field (width). enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway .NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. or frame. BMP. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. click . The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . 20 On the File menu. For Save as type. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. and click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Save. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you open each image. for Model Graphics Style. or any single-frame format. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Save. verify that the value is set to 15. or GIF. depending on the Frame Range. select Winter Solstice. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. and click OK. NOTE When you export to PNG. select PNG. on the Single-Day tab. To view the animation. TIFF. select Frame range. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. In this example. For File name. Under Output Length. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. For Dimensions. Under Format. of the animation separately. For Frames per second. 8 In the Save As dialog. such as JPEG. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. 18 In the Save As dialog. Los Angeles. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. click OK. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop.

9 On the File menu. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. under 3D Views. click Save.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and on the View Control Bar. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 . 5 Select the roof. as shown.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.

and click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog. click the Multi-Day tab. 18 On the File menu. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click Save. select One week. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. For Time Interval. click Save. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. click OK.Week Interval. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. 8 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. specify 2:00 pm. and click OK. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. MA. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. and click OK. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.Los Angeles . 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For Time. In the Save As dialog. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.Boston. select Full Frames (Uncompressed).Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Compressor. USA. On the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . under Sun and Shadows Settings. 17 On the View Control Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Click the Desktop icon. for File name enter 2pm . for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.

click Apply. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. Orienting to True North | 391 . click . 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 11 Under Date and Time. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Then. select Summer Solstice. select Cast Shadows. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 11:00 AM for time. click the Still tab. click . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. In this exercise. and select Winter Solstice. on the Still tab. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. and click OK. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. click . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 Under Date and Time. For example.

and select View Properties. click . select True North. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. under Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. Notice that the project rotates in the view. click the Still tab. double-click 01 Entry. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Orientation. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. and click OK. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. in the Angle from Project to True North field. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. under Graphics.

click Summer Solstice. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Orienting to True North | 393 . click . and click Apply. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. including the angle from True North. verify that AVI Files is selected. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Los Angeles. For Save as type. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click OK. click the Single-Day tab. select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. under 3D Views. 21 On the View Control Bar.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. for File name. are saved with the project. In the Save As dialog.

it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. 28 Once you are finished with the study. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. On the Options Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Compressor. click Raytrace. click GO. double-click 01 Entry. enter 600 in the first field. Right-click in the drawing area. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. for Scene. for Resolution. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. and click OK. 29 On the File menu. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. In this exercise. Click the Desktop icon. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. for Dimensions. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Draft (75 dpi). Since a rendered image is temporary. On the Options Bar. and select View Properties.■ Under Format. select Project North. under Graphics. for Orientation. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. capturing it. click Save. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Rendered views do not have this limitation. and click OK. and exporting it as a JPEG image. under 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.

under Renderings. click Export Image. The scene is rendered in high resolution.■ ■ On the Options Bar. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. for Resolution. 5 On the Design Bar. In the Save As dialog. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. select JPEG. In the Project Browser. click Save. select Presentation (300 dpi). NOTE Rendered views are temporary. and click Save. On the Options Bar. click Capture Rendering. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. click GO. for Save as Type. Rendering an Interior View | 395 . 7 Review some captured images of the building. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

or the client. a consultant. Advanced Model Graphics. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. For the realistic approach. an outside reviewer. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you explore the stylistic approach. length. and Section Boxes. To express texture beyond material specifics. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. type. elevations. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. there are several options for expressing the architecture. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. In this tutorial." In Revit Architecture. the Linework Tool. and details. sections.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . In this series of exercises. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering.

you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Co-house. Using the pre-built building model.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales.

and open Metric\m_Cohouse. right-click 2nd Flr. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. expand Floor Plans. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. expand Views (all). A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. you create a presentation floor plan. you create a copy of the plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and so on in this view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Cnst. elevations.2 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. Up Arrow. 7 Under Visibility. 8 Click OK. exit the menu. under Floor Plans. expand the Stairs category. click Visibility/Graphics. UP Text. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Down Arrow. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click the Annotation Categories tab. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear DOWN Text. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click in the drawing area. Notice that no annotations display in this view. this represents the view getting smaller. sections. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and click Rename. 10 On the File menu. dimensions. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. click the Scale control and select 1:100. click Save As.

on the Still tab. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. At that place. Within a Project. Under Shadows Properties. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . the darker the shadows. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . 6 Under Settings. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. ■ Under Intensity. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 Under Settings. navigate to the folder of your choice. 2 On the View Control Bar. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. and click Save. specify 35 for Shadow. select Sun and Shadow Settings. modify. double-click it in the Project Browser. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings.rvt. you can create. 8 Select Boston. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. MA. The higher the number. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. Time and Place. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select By Date. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.11 In the Save As directory. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. click the Place tab. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. USA for City.rvt. click for Place. 12 Proceed with the next exercise.

click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. clear Ground Plane at Level. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. and select 1st Flr. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. be aware that if you enter a different city. 17 On the File menu. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. click . “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time.NOTE For this step. however. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. click Save. under Settings. click OK. you can enter any city you wish. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. 11 Click OK. Cnst.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . 4 In the Views dialog. and notice a view title displays. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click Sheet. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click to place it. select Arch Portrait. right-click the Design Bar. and click View. click Add View. and click OK. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 6 On the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click Add View to Sheet. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

enter Presentation. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. under Graphics. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click Duplicate. For this analytique. and click OK. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select No for Show Title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 9 On the Options Bar. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click OK. To accomplish this. click . click Edit/New. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Activate View. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet.

21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . select Invisible Lines. for Fill Pattern. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. If necessary. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 26 In the Type Properties dialog.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 25 In the Name dialog. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. under Graphics. click Region Properties. 22 On the Design Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. and select Chain. click . 20 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click . click . and click OK. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. enter Solid Black. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. fill properties. and the boundary of the region. When you are finished drawing the chain. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 17 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 18 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region.

32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. under Identity Data. scroll down. click OK. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Name. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 34 On the File menu. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. click Finish Sketch. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. select Solid Fill. and click OK.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. click Save. and click View Properties. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. 35 Proceed with the next lesson.

8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Elevations. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. under Visibility. on the Model Categories tab. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Visibility. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Views (all). and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. expand Elevations. click Visibility/Graphics. expand the Doors category.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Copy of South. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 9 Click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and click OK. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Pattern Overrides. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click in the Walls row. click Override. scroll up. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and clear Elevation Swing. exit the menu. click in the drawing area. right-click South. clear Visible.rvt. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 35 for Shadow. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. select By Date. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. By changing the angle of the sun.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click . and click OK. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. under Settings. 12 Under Shadow Properties. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. click Duplicate. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. Time and Place. click OK. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. 20 On the File menu. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Save. 13 Under Intensity. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows.

and double-click A105 .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. click Add View. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Notice the viewport displays a view title. under Views (all). 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . expand Sheets (all).rvt.

Notice the view title no longer displays. 7 On the Design Bar. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify. select Viewport: Presentation.5 In the Type Selector. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.8 On the File menu. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

3 On the Options Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). select 1: 100 for Scale.rvt. expand Sections (Callout 1). you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. Section 2 is added to the building model. double-click 1st Flr. To accomplish this. under Floor Plans. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Cnst. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. and double-click Section 2. 4 Add the section shown below. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. To fit correctly in the analytique.

select 1 : 100 for Scale. click Override. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. enter Presentation Section 2. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. right-click Callout of Section 2. click Modify. clear Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Callout. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 15 Under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click the Model Categories tab. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click in the Walls row. and click OK.

under Extents. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. 22 On the Options Bar. 20 Click OK. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. and clear Elevation Swing. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. expand the Doors category. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When you select the crop boundary. click . and click OK. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.17 Under Visibility. clear Crop Region Visible. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. scroll up. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. clear Annotation Crop.

In addition. Under Intensity. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. specify 35 for Shadow. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise.24 On the File menu. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. double-click Presentation Section 2. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. select Cast Shadows. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Save. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Shadows Properties.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Click Apply. under Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. open the Project Browser and. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.

Silhouette Edges. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. click Save. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. and click OK. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. click . 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Override Silhouettes. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. select Directly. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. click OK. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Duplicate. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. was added to this dataset for training purposes. NOTE The line style. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify an Altitude of 70 degrees.In the steps that follow. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. under Settings. 11 On the File menu. select Relative to View. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 5 In the Name dialog. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. select Viewport: Presentation. click Add View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view. 3 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 5 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view title no longer displays. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.rvt. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). select Section: Presentation Section 2.Presentation. click Modify. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 .

click .Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. Using a clock as a reference. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. To rotate an object. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. under Sections (Callout 1). move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. and press ENTER. 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you click to specify the start radius. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. double-click Section 2. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 .Presentation. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. and drag it up and to the left as shown. under Sheets (all). Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. double-click A105 .

3 In the New View Template dialog. click Save. enter Presentation. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. double-click Presentation Section 2. 16 On the File menu.15 On the Design Bar. click Create View Template from View. After applying the view template to a new section view. and click OK. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click OK. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 On the View menu. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Modify. 4 In the View Templates dialog. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.

right-click Copy of Section 1. 16 On the View menu. and click Add View to Sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. click View Properties. and click Rename. 12 In the Views dialog. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Type 1). select Presentation. double-click A105 . and click Activate View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Viewport: Presentation. lighting fixtures. right-click Section 1. and click OK. annotations. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . 7 In the Rename View dialog.Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 15 Right-click the viewport.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. click Add View. Now. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click OK. under Sheets (all). 14 In the Type Selector. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. click Apply View Template. you can simply apply the presentation view template. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. Notice the furniture. and elevation swings no longer display. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Presentation Section 1. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu.

select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. In this exercise. and click Deactivate View. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. 20 On the File menu. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. 18 Right-click the viewport. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. under Graphics. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. such as a tracery window or column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.17 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.

click Modify. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown.rvt. Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1).Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. select the callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. click Callout. enter Presentation Callout. double-click Section 1. double-click Presentation Callout. After you add the callout. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

under Extents. 8 Right-click. clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Annotation Crop.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown.

Presentation. click Add View. and click Activate View. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. and click Add View to Sheet. click Modify.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. select Section: Presentation Callout. select Custom for View Scale. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . under Sheets (all). and move it into the position shown below. 17 On the View menu. select Viewport: Presentation. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. and click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. double-click A105 . 14 In the Type Selector. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.

you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). You do not have to replicate the image exactly. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Solid Black for Type. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. activate the viewport. and make adjustments as necessary. When finished. click Region Properties. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. double-click Presentation Callout. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the steps that follow. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.

28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. and sketch the rectangle shown below.26 On the Project Browser. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . 29 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. click .Presentation. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.

select Crop Region Visible. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.30 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the crop region. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. click Finish Sketch. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. click View Properties. under Extents. 31 On the View menu.

and apply shadows to the views. and click Deactivate View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise.34 On the View menu. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click Save. 37 On the File menu. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. click View Properties. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.

click . click the Scale control. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View menu. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Under Shadows Properties. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. under 3D Views. select Cast Shadows. Under Intensity. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click 1 : 200. double-click Isometric. and click OK. 7 In the Name dialog. specify 35 for Shadow. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Duplicate. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.

enter Isometric 2. and click OK.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. in the list. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric 1. and click Rename. enter Isometric 1. Select Ground Plane at Level. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Select 1st Flr. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. and click Rename. under Silhouette Edges. select Override Silhouettes. under Settings. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. select Section Box. under 3D Views. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Select Relative to View. Cnst. under Extents. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 16 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Isometric 2. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. and click OK. 9 Click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Isometric. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. 15 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the View menu. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. click View Properties.

TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. right-click Isometric 2. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. 22 In the Project Browser. You can use this to rotate the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. make a duplicate of the view. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. and click Rename.20 Select the section box. under 3D Views. click Modify on the Design Bar. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. When you are finished. 23 In the Project Browser.

NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. double-click A105 . the stairs and railings may display. enter Isometric 3. 31 To hide the section box. double-click Isometric 2. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. In such a case. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 26 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. and click OK. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. either adjust the plane location. 25 In the Project Browser. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. Next. 29 Select the section box. double-click Isometric 3.Presentation. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. When you are finished. and click OK.24 In the Rename View dialog. Notice the section box no longer displays. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . click Modify on the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 34 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. select Viewport: Presentation. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and.

under 3D Views. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. in the Type Selector. 36 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport: Presentation.35 In the Project Browser.

You change this back to solid fill when you are done. and on the Options Bar. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 40 In the Element Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 47 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. and click Activate View. 39 On the Design Bar. click Lines. This will make it easier to draw lines. select Transparent for Background. click Region Properties. 42 Click OK twice. 44 Using the drawing tools. under Graphics. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 43 On the Design Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . and then click Edit/New. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. 45 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the poche filled region. click Edit. click Finish Sketch. The image below shows the lines redrawn. select Solid Black for Type. and click OK. select Concrete for Type.

click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Camera.49 On the File menu. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. you create the final view for the analytique. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. then you specify the eye direction and range. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. you add it to the presentation sheet. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. a cutaway perspective view. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.

4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. select Cast Shadows. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 35 for Shadow. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click . 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Intensity.The view opens immediately. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . Under Shadows Properties.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. under Extents.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. A section box now cuts through the building model. and click OK. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click View Properties. select Override Silhouettes. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 12 Select the section box. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style.

14 Select the crop boundary. enter 165 mm for Width. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. 17 Under Model Crop Size. under Change. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. After placing it. and click OK. you must specify the actual size of the image. under Sheets (all). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. under 3D Views. double-click A105 . and place it in the upper-left corner as shown.Presentation. clear Section Boxes. Clear Crop Region Visible. 19 To hide the section box. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 21 In the Project Browser. click Size. 18 To hide the crop region.

“Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. click Edit/New. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. specify a text size of 40 mm. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.rvt. 5 In the Name dialog. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. click Text. select the same font as the title. select Text : Title. enter Description. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. and click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.22 On the File menu. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. enter Title. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select a font. click OK. 9 In the Name dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click . and click OK. click Save. click Duplicate.

18 On the File menu. 17 On the Design Bar. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description. click Modify.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 15 In the Type Selector. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. click Save.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

15 On the Design Bar. click you created. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click Wall by Face. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . 19 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar.200mm displays. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 16 On the View toolbar. for Loc Line. select Core Face: Exterior. 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 20 In the Type Selector. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click .

27 Select the left face of the left mass. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . 29 Using the same technique. click Create System. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.23 On the View toolbar. click to view only the walls and roofs. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. 28 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System. 26 In the Type Selector.

and select it. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the mass face shown below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Create Roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . click Roof by Face. click . and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Wall by Face. 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. select the other wall.30 On the View toolbar.

and select the mass face shown below. click to view the building that you have created. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. 38 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Curtain System. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create System. 39 Click to redisplay the masses.

as shown. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . specify a point for the camera target. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. In the far left corner of the building that you created. 44 On the View toolbar. roofs. under Floor Plans. The perspective view created by the camera displays.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. click in the view. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. to view only the walls. Below the right corner of the view. double-click Level 1. click Camera.

Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. click . Click the frame to display its grips. and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 46 On the Options Bar. select Center.You may need to resize the view again. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. select Center. Click OK. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click Modify.

53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 51 Right-click. double-click 3D View 1. 55 On the View toolbar. double-click {3D}. click . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building.50 Select each roof to display its grips. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. 52 In the Project Browser. 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. 57 In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. and click Cancel to end the command. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. under 3D Views. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. and move the roof edges as shown below. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .59 Save and close the drawing.

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. 475 . Even though various types within a family can look completely different. thus the term family. In this tutorial. material set.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. they are still related and come from a single source. each with a different size. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. shape.

such as a dome roof. but you cannot create new system families. Standalone families include columns.rfa extension. and partition wall styles. You can load them into projects. The basic walls system family. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . You can duplicate and modify existing system families. trees. however. while many more are stored in component libraries. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. Host-based families have components that require hosts. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. exceptions to this rule. floors. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. floors. You also learn about the Family Editor. In this lesson. Walls. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. In addition. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. has wall types that define interior. For example. and when and how to use it. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. and roofs. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . and roofs are examples of these types of families. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. foundation. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. because there is only one file to track. generic. There are.rfa extension. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . transfer them from one project to another. exterior. and furniture. for example. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Using the Family Editor. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. This makes file management much easier. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type.

The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. In the final exercise. 2 On the File menu. such as plan. However. you learn about the Family Editor. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. or you can load it using the Load From Library.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. elevation. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and also a standalone furniture family component. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. how to access it. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. if you change the original family. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. for example. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. custom wall treatments. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. You create in-place families only within the current project. you can drag it into the document window. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. and when to use it. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. To add a family to your project. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. or 3D. In this section. it is saved with the project. After the family has been loaded in the project. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. Load Family command on the File menu. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 .

such as newsgroups. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. modify it as needed. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. Within the Windows® environment. you learn when to use the Family Editor. you can double-click any file with an . it should be available within the Type Selector. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. and then load it into the project. and click Open. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. In this case. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. presume it is a bay window that you require. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. how to access it. select the appropriate template. open it in the Family Editor. navigate to a family file. and click Open. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. consider checking the web library and other web resources. When the family opens. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. To start a new family. With Revit Architecture open. If you find a close match. if you have exhausted your external resources. 9 Save the newly-defined family. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you can click File ➤ Open. it opens within the Family Editor. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 5 Finally.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. 3 Next. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family.In this exercise.

not within the Family Editor. Using the installed templates. When you create an in-place family. you learn how to create a different type of component. You create a furniture family.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. you create it within the project file. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. In addition. a lighting fixture. and several annotation families. In each lesson. you create an in-place family. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. 479 .

and Sweep. lineweight settings. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. When you are in sketch mode. switch between the different host types. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. fill patterns. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. To quit the sketch mode. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. it automatically cuts the solid. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. if required. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. Blend. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. continue to incrementally add reference planes. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. line patterns. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. materials. and pin those reference planes. Solids and Voids are sketch based. line colors. If you place the void before you add the solid. if the family includes a host. and export settings for selected geometry. Base and Top. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. create different host types for testing purposes. build geometry. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. and test after each step. Each sketch is set to a different height. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. Revolve. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. Note that no geometry is created. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views.

rft. and on the Options Bar. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. click to pin the reference planes. click Training Files. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. and click Open. Level is open. and click OK. on the Edit toolbar. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. You have created a new furniture family. select Metric Furniture. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. 8 Using the same method. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. 5 While pressing CTRL. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. Adding Reference Planes Next.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. and create one below. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . select both reference planes. The floor plan Ref. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Ref Plane. and create one to the right. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. . 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. and click OK. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back).

Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. for Identity Data ➤ Name. and click OK. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Left. click . on the Options Bar. You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.4 Click Modify.

If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. name the other reference planes Right. top). The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. These behave the same as strong references. click . The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. use Left for the Is Reference value. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. right. and click OK. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter.7 Using the same method. the strong reference is always captured first. and on the Options Bar. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. 1 Select the Left reference plane. and Back. left. select Left. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. as shown. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. The reference allows minor strength snapping. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Front. for Other ➤ Is Reference. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. 2 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Dimension. enter 300mm.3 Using the same method. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. for Label. enter 750mm. Front. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the dimension line. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. for Name. and press ENTER. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . We want drive Length. enter Length. Width. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. For Group parameter under. Repeat for the other reference plane. Repeat for the other reference plane. select Add Parameter. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. and press ENTER. select Dimensions. 5 Click Modify. and Back). 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. and click above the planes to place the dimension.

and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. click Dimension. 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 .9 Using the same method. 12 Using the same method. dimension the horizontal reference planes. click to place the dimension. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar.

14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. Base Front. select Not a Reference. and press ENTER. and click OK.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you need to specify the Is Reference values. Now the reference planes can be used in the family. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Base Right. and click . click Ref Plane. but do not appear in the project. for Other ➤ Is Reference. click the base reference planes. 16 While pressing CTRL. and Base Back. name them Base Left. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog.

and lock the dimension.19 Using the same method. 20 On the Design Bar. position the remaining new reference planes. 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . click Dimension.

Under Is Reference. You can dimension reference planes in plan. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. Click OK. elevation. select Not a Reference. 26 Select the middle reference plane. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .22 Using the same method. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Design Bar. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Next. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. double-click Front. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. The front view displays. and section views. under Elevations. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. enter Base Bottom. click Ref Plane. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. and lock the dimensions. By default.

select Top. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 32 On the Design Bar. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Dimensions. click Dimension. 34 Lock the dimension. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. For Identity Data ➤ Name. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . enter Height. enter Top. Click OK. 36 Click Modify. and save the file as Cabinet. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. for Name. 37 Select the last dimension added. Click OK. select Add Parameter. for Label.rfa. Under Group parameter under. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click to place the dimension. 30 With the top reference plane still selected. In the next exercise. on the Options Bar. Under Is Reference. navigate to Training/Metric/Families.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog.

for Name. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. When a family is loaded in a project. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. for Height. For Length. enter 1800. click New. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. for Width. for Height. 10 Click Apply. 8 Using the same method. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. for Width. 4 In the Name dialog. For Length. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. 3 In the Family Types dialog. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. under Floor plans. enter 2000. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. 7 Click Apply. double-click Ref. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. 5 Using the same method. parameters. click Family Types. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. enter 2800. under Family Types.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. enter 800. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. and dimensions are specified. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Click OK. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. but no geometry has been added. each type is represented with selected parameters. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. Level. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. enter 1000. enter 1000.

This option will display the Work Plane dialog. In that case. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. create an extrusion from the plan view. In such an instance. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. double-click Ref. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. select the geometry. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. Level.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. 2 On the Design Bar. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. where you can define the plane. Creating Geometry In this lesson.

When the parameters Length and Width change. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes.3 On the Options Bar. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. 6 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. When the setup is more complex. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. click . 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view.

and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser. click (Align). NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it. double-click Front. 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. under Elevations. 10 Lock the dimension. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Solid Forms | 493 .

494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. double-click Front. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. click . 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Modify. 23 Save the file. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . under View Specific Display. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. under Elevations. Level. double-click Ref. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). clear Plan/RCP. and click OK.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 13 On the Design Bar.

and lock the geometry. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. on the Options Bar. 2 While pressing CTRL. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. and click the locks to create the constraint. the software automatically creates the correct plan. and lock the geometry. 1 In the Project Browser. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. When you use 3D geometry. The lines display again. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under Detail Levels. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. under Floor plans. 4 On the Design Bar. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Visibility. 14 On the View Control Bar. but not in coarse. and section views of the family. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. 8 While pressing CTRL. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. elevation. For example. Level. 10 On the View Control Bar. select a different family type. They are view direction specific. select both lines and. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. select the symbolic line. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. For the furniture family. and click OK. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . The lines are greyed out. Click Modify. elevation. double-click Ref. and section views. verify that the Line tool is active. 5 On the Options Bar. By design. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. click Symbolic Lines. and click Apply. clear Coarse. click Family Types. 3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. 13 Click OK.

Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 5 Save the file. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D views. set a 3D view of the family current. double-click View 1. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser. Before you save the family.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. 2 On the View Control Bar. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This opens a predefined 3D view.

10 In the Project Browser. and click to place them. All the family types you created are listed as options. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. under Cabinet. 12 On the Views toolbar. click . click (3D). this view is maintained when the family is opened again. Creating a Door Family | 497 . If required.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. The family is loaded into the new project. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. 13 Close all open projects or families. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet. 9 In the Project Browser. Creating a Door Family In this lesson. 11 Click Modify. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. drag each of the types into the drawing area. click Load into Projects. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet.

you draw the plan view components for the new door family. The door type has a variable height and width. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. and thickness. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. height. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families.rft. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

4 On the View menu. 10 On the Options Bar. are also displayed. Level. part of the door properties. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 6 Maximize the window. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. Labelled dimensions. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . click . select Doors [projection]. Notice the four tiled views. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click Tile. 7 Enter ZF. click Symbolic Lines. and represent the door opening profile. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 9 In the Type Selector. Floor Plan: Ref. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. 5 On the Window menu.

500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . select Thickness for Label. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. select Width for Label. 17 On the Options Bar. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Because labelled dimensions are parameters.

502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Symbolic Lines. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 21 On the Design Bar. as shown. 22 In the Type selector. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. select Plan Swing [cut]. then you specify each end point. When drawing an arc from center and end points. and select the command from the menu. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. In the image below. you first specify the arc center. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. click the down arrow button. 24 Enter SI. along with the witness line controls. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. 23 On the Options Bar. click .Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it.

and click . 3 On the Design Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 50 mm for Depth. double-click Exterior. and click OK. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. click Lines. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Specify a new Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. under Elevations. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . click Set Work Plane.

click Dimension. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. 10 On the Design Bar. then click to specify the dimension witness line. click Finish Sketch.8 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Left.

17 On the Options Bar. Level. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. 19 Under Detail Levels. and When cut in Plan/RCP. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. select Front/Back. click Modify and select the dimension. select Thickness for Label. and Fine are selected. double-click Ref. Left/Right. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . under View Specific Display. click Visibility. click Modify. Medium. 14 In the Project Browser.12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. verify that Coarse. and clear Plan/RCP. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar.

click OK. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Materials. select Panel for Subcategory. and click OK. 3 In the New Material dialog. click OK. click Duplicate. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. click 11 In the Materials dialog. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.20 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Material. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. for Material. under AccuRender. 6 Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. click 17 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. enter Oak Door for Name. click OK. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. click . 2 In the Materials dialog. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506.No Gloss. under Name. 4 In the Materials dialog. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. you assign a material to the door leaf.Red/Stained. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dark. and click OK. 7 In the Materials dialog. select Oak Door for Name. click . navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. click . The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select Oak Door. click for Texture. 5 In the Material Library dialog.

Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. under 3D Views. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. and select Shading with Edges. under Views (all). 21 On the View Control Bar. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 . click the Model Graphics Style control. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Family Types. enter 2500 mm for Height. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 27 Click OK. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Click Apply. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 2000 mm for Height. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Under Other. under Family Types. Click Apply. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. By flexing the new component. In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 25 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. Under Other. click New. click Family Types. 24 On the Design Bar. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. click Save. Define the third new door type. click New ➤ Project. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. enter 2000 mm for Height. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 9 In the Name dialog. under Template file. 17 Under Create new. Enter 1220 mm for Width. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. Click Apply. click New. Click Apply. 6 In the Name dialog. Training Door. Training Door. click New. 5 Under Family Types. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar.4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2134 mm for Height. click Load. 12 On the File menu. Click Apply. enter 2100 mm for Height. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Training Files. 11 Click OK. Enter 750 mm for Width. and click OK. 15 In the New Project dialog. 10 In the Family Types dialog.rte. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. and click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. 8 Under Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Wall. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select it. 20 In the Open dialog. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. click Browse. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name.rfa. select Project. Enter 925 mm for Width. and click Open. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 7 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Defining New Door Types | 509 . click Door. Define the second new door type. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

28 In the Type Selector. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 24 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 25 On the Design Bar. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. and select Shading with Edges.23 On the View toolbar. 26 In the Type Selector. click Door. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm.

This completes the lesson. height. Finally. Creating a Window Family | 511 . You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and specify values for the window width. default sill height.30 In the Type Selector. and mullion offset. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. and create the window sash as a sweep. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. You create the window frame. Creating a Door Family. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. glazing and mullions as extrusions. 32 You can close all files without saving.

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. click New ➤ Family. The window type has a variable height and width. also one of the window properties. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. When you add labels to dimensions.rft. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. The label name. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. 5 Enter ZF. you specify the parameters for the new window family. click Training Files. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. Height and Default Sill Height. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. equally spaced vertical mullions. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 On the File menu. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. is one of the type parameters.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click Apply. click Lines.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. Change the height and width values again. 8 In the Family Types dialog. click . “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. click Sketch 2D Path. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click OK. This process is called “flexing the model. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Click Apply. then sketching the sweep profile. 2 On the Design Bar. Enter 1800 mm for Width. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 4 On the Options Bar. Snap the cursor to each corner. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. click Family Types. This is the starting point for the new window. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. enter 1300 mm for Height. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. 3 On the Design Bar.

10 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select 1:10. click the Scale control. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. and click Open View.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. click Finish Path. and specify an offset of 50 mm. select Elevation: Right. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Go To View dialog. click Ref Plane. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. click . click Sketch Profile.

21 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Dimension. 25 Below the red dot. select Prefer: Wall faces. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. click . enter Sash for the Name. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 24 On the Options Bar.15 On the Design Bar. and select the reference plane. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . click Modify. click Lines. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Chain and click . and select the dimension.

When the lock displays. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the exact dimensions are not critical. When the lock displays. click Modify. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. However.

When the lock displays. 30 On the Design Bar. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. TIP After adding the dimension. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. and specify the dimension value. click Modify. as shown. click Dimension. select the line you want to move.

When the lock displays. When the lock displays. 36 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sweep. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . this is the top of the window opening. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension.Modify each dimension if necessary. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. click the lock to constrain the present value. click . Next. click Finish Profile. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. 37 On the Design Bar. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. zoom out until it displays. click the lock to constrain the present value.

under Views (all). Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. click . and enter . click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Options Bar. press TAB to cycle through the selection options.45 mm for Depth. Chain of walls or lines. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. and double-click View 1. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. click Set Work Plane. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. double-click Exterior. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. If necessary. and select the option. expand 3D Views. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . 2 On the Design Bar. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. 39 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. and select Lock.

50 mm for Offset.The entire sash outline is selected. ■ Click . and lock icons display on each line. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. ■ ■ Enter . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 On the Design Bar. set the following options: Click . click Finish Sketch.

The window sash extrusion is now complete. 11 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. under 3D Views. double-click View 1. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521.10 In the Project Browser. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. under Elevations. double-click Right.

3 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 On the Design Bar. as shown. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. click Ref Plane. click . and enter 30 mm for Offset. double-click Right. under Elevations.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. enter -12 mm for Depth. click Lines. click . Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 14 In the Work Plane dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 15 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . and select Lock. under Elevations. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. click .5 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Identity Data. 16 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. double-click Exterior. 8 Select the reference plane. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary.

click Modify. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under Elevations. 23 On the Design Bar. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. sash. After the family is loaded into a project. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. and click OK. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. View the window model with frame. double-click Right. click . you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog.

enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. click Family Types. Under Other. double-click View 1. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. NOTE After flexing the model. Click Apply. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. under 3D Views. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected.24 In the Project Browser. Enter 1500 mm for Width. For example. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. 26 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1500 mm for Height.

2 On the Design Bar. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 On the Design Bar. the exact location is not critical. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526.27 Click Cancel. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Ref Plane. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 On the Edit toolbar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Dimension. click to return the window to its original dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . Do not be concerned with dimension values. After adding the dimension. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. click Modify. as shown. as shown.

Under Group parameter under.. Click OK. select Dimensions. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Select Instance.. 11 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. click Family Types. enter Mullion Offset for Name. Under Parameter Data.> for Label. under Dimensions. and click OK. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. select <Add parameter. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .9 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Family Types dialog.

enter 14 mm for Depth. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 17 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 15 On the Design Bar. However.14 Click the dimension value. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. move the dimension value as shown. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click . click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Modify. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 23 On the Options Bar. select Mullion Offset for Label. click Lines. under Specify a new Work Plane. As you did before. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

26 On the Design Bar. Move the dimension values as shown. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.After you complete the sketch. click Dimension. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines.

select Family parameter. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 30 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK. click Modify. enter Mullion Width for Name. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. select Dimensions. 29 On the Design Bar. Under Group parameter under. select <Add parameter> for Label. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.

■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Select the dimension. and on the Options Bar. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. 33 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. click Finish Sketch. Remember. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. and click Apply. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. 35 In the Family Types dialog. select Mullion Width for Label. This is changed in later steps.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left.

select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Under Other. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . or undoing the same. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. click Set Work Plane. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. 38 On the Edit toolbar. In this case. enter 1500 mm for Height. 40 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. 37 Click Cancel. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. and aligned with the sash edge. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. NOTE After flexing the model.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. evenly spaced.

click Dimension. click Dimension. 47 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. 43 On the Options Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown.42 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 49 On the Design Bar. click . and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. click Modify. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. as shown.

select Mullion Width for Label. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. Move the dimension value as shown. and on the Options Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. select Mullion Width for Label. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. Select the dimension.50 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Remember.

54 Select the horizontal mullions. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. 55 In the Project Browser. If necessary. Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. and select the vertical mullions. under 3D Views.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. click Join Geometry. double-click View 1.

click Family Types. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. you can still see the window. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Under Other. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 .Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm for Height. 57 On the Design Bar. 59 Click Cancel. so when you open the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. 58 In the Family Types dialog.

and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. under AccuRender. under Elevations. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. sash. 4 In the Materials dialog. 3 In the New Material dialog. you assign materials to the frame. sash. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. and click OK. click Materials. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .60 On the Edit toolbar. click OK. Dark. and the mullions. 6 In the Materials dialog. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and click OK. the sash. 5 In the Material Library dialog. No Gloss. enter Pine Frame for Name. select Stained. double-click Exterior. click the Model Graphics Style control. 9 Select the window frame sweep. click to return the window to its original dimensions. and select Shading with Edges. Yellow/. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. click for Texture. click Duplicate. 8 On the View Control Bar. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. 2 In the Materials dialog.

12 Under Materials and Finishes. double-click View 1. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser. verify that Coarse. and Fine are selected. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. and click OK. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click for Material. click Visibility. 23 Under Detail Levels. Medium. 13 In the Materials dialog. under 3D Views. double-click Right. under View Specific Display. clear the other view options.10 On the Options Bar. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK. under View Specific Display. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Design Bar. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). select Edit for Visibility. under Graphics. and click OK. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. 16 Under Detail Levels. 20 Select the glass extrusion. click OK. under Identity Data. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . 21 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Pine Frame for Name. verify that Coarse. click . Medium. and Fine are selected.

you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. mullions. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. sash. Defining New Window Types In this exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. The window frame. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. and glass display their assigned materials.

Defining New Window Types | 541 . The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. In the Family Types dialog. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. and click Apply.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. and click Apply. 2 On the Design Bar. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. 3 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types.

but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. 7 In the Name dialog. click New. and click OK. Click Apply. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. and click Apply. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. 8 In the Family Types dialog.The window height is doubled. Enter 1250 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 5 In the Family Types dialog. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Family Types.

Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types.9 Under Family Types. Click Apply. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. click New. and click OK. 10 In the Name dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Defining New Window Types | 543 . 19 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. 13 In the Name dialog. click Load. 15 On the File menu. 14 In the Family Types dialog. click Save.rfa. Enter 1300 mm for Height. 11 In the Family Types dialog. Training Window. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. click New. click Window. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. Click OK. click to start a new project based on your default template. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK.

24 On the Options Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Thin Lines. 32 On the View menu. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 27 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. Notice the detail that displays. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. and select Shading with Edges. 25 In the Type Selector.20 In the Open dialog. click . 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Open. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall.rfa file. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 34 On the View toolbar. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. clear Tag on Placement. click Window. 33 Zoom in on the center window. 31 On the Design Bar. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 35 On the View Control Bar. click Wall. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. select it.

sketch. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. This allows you to drive lineweights. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. Instance parameter means. Solid Blend. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. elevation. Basically. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. line colors. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Solid Revolve. and materials of the subcategories. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. line patterns. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. you plan. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. model lines. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. Model lines are displayed in every view. a parameter drives geometry in a family. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. For example. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. and section views of a family. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 .You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion.

By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. Section. Medium and Fine. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. and Elevation views. you should define different widths for each of the casements. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

1 Close all open projects or families.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. The family template uses a wall as host. click Training Files. and click Open. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . select Metric Window.rft. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. The family editor is opened with a new window family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

Verify that Defines Origin is selected. . and on the Options Bar. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. select Defines Origin. so you model the new opening first. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for Is Reference. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. enter 400. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click Modify. Under Other. for Structure ➤ Thickness. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. Click OK. accept the default name. click Edit. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 10 Click OK 3 times. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. and click . 7 In the Name dialog. for Construction ➤ Structure. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted.4 Select the wall. 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. In the Type Selector. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. click Duplicate. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. select Weak Reference. click . enter Insertion Edge. click Ref Plane. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. for Name. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. . Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. and click OK. in the Edit toolbar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Other. select Wall Closure. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. click Edit/New.

This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. enter Insertion Depth. on the Options Bar. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. Next. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. for Label. 14 Using the same method. click Dimension. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. 17 Click Modify. and click . click Dimension. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. for Identity Data ➤ Name. select Constraints. for the temporary dimension. By extending the reference pane. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. Click OK. 23 Click Modify. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. 19 Select the dimension. For Group parameter under. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. select Add Parameter. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 12 Using the same method. and select Instance. dimension the vertical reference planes. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. enter 75. enter Wall Offset Left. and click OK.10 Select the first reference plane you created. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane.

for the temporary dimension. 32 Click Modify.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. on the Options Bar. click Dimension. 25 Select the dimension. Click OK. on the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. For Group parameter under. select Add Parameter. and click . and click OK. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. on the Options Bar. for Label. under Elevations. select Construction. for Label. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. for Name. 28 Select the dimension. 33 Select the new reference plane. double-click Exterior. select Wall Offset. select Add Parameter. 35 On the Design Bar. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. select Construction. for Name. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. The skeleton for the opening is complete. 27 Using the same method. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Identity Data ➤ Name. 30 On the Design Bar. enter Wall Offset. Click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 100. for the temporary dimension. For Group parameter under. enter Wall Offset Top. enter 100. Next. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. and press ENTER. 38 Select the dimension. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. for Label. enter Wall Offset Top. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.

8 Using the same method. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Tools toolbar. for Name. and lock the alignment. Level. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. and sketch the extrusion as shown. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Wall Offset Left. click (Plane). click (Align). click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane.rfa. 4 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane : Sill. click . 5 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK.40 Save the file as Casement Window. select the top edge of the sketch. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . double-click Ref. 6 On the Tools toolbar. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry.

and lock the alignment. Right. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. Interior. Also. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. click (3D). under Elevations. click (Align). and press DELETE. 16 On the Views toolbar. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. and lock the alignment. 15 Using the same method. and Left reference planes.9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. In order to use the voids as a new opening. 12 On the Tools toolbar. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. click Finish Sketch. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). double-click Exterior. 10 Using the same method.

The opening in the wall is deleted. click (Cut Geometry). you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 . and then select the wall geometry. Next. cut the second void from the wall. 18 On the Tools toolbar. The first void is cut from the wall. 20 Using the same method. 19 Select the void.

For Other ➤ Is Reference. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. Level. enter 50mm. double-click Ref. enter Frame Left. for the temporary dimension. under Floor Plans. For Identity Data ➤ Name. select Not a Reference. enter 100mm. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 3 Select the reference plane. 5 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Click OK. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the reference plane. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. enter 50mm. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. For Wall Offset. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. Note that the opening has changed correctly. click Family Types. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. and click . 1 In the Project Browser.

16 Select the left dimension. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . select Frame Width. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Add Parameter. on the Options Bar. enter Frame Width. 17 Using the same method. for Label. Click OK. For Group parameter under. select Construction. enter Frame Right. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. on the Options Bar. for the temporary dimension. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. enter 100mm. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. name it Frame Interior. for Label. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. select Not a Reference. click Dimension. For Other ➤ Is Reference. for Name. Click OK. 14 Select the right dimension.

NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . dimension the planes at 120mm. and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. 19 Using the same method used previously. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right.

enter Frame Height Top. name it Frame Top. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 28 Select the lower dimension. on the Options Bar. enter 150mm. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. For Group parameter under. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. 24 On the Design Bar. 27 Using the same method. under Elevations. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. click Dimension. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. Click OK. select Add Parameter. select Construction. select Add Parameter. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Label. enter Frame Height Bottom. select Not a Reference. on the Options Bar. For Group parameter under. for the temporary dimension. Click OK. Click OK. 22 Select the reference plane. select Construction. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. 30 Select the other dimension. enter Frame Bottom. for Label. For Identity Data ➤ Name. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane.

enter 100mm. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. enter 60mm. enter 80mm. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. and click OK. enter 1500mm. enter 80mm. Before you model the frame geometry. for Insertion Depth. A family type manages type parameters only. For Wall Offset. enter 70mm. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. click New. enter 2000mm. enter 50mm. enter 100mm. click Family Types. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. Under Construction. For Frame Width. For Frame Height Bottom. enter 80mm. for Wall Offset Top. 36 Under Family Types. For Width. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Frame Height Top. enter 50mm. Under Construction. for Insertion Depth. enter 100mm. for Wall Offset Top. enter 100mm. 35 In the Name dialog.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 50mm. Under Other. Under Dimensions. For Center Post Width. 34 Under Family Types. for Frame Depth. click New. For Frame Width. For Wall Offset. 37 In the Name dialog. for Height.

42 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 1500mm. click . select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. click (Align). For Width. enter 120mm. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Frame Bottom. 45 On the Tools toolbar. enter 70mm. 43 On the Design Bar. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. 44 On the Options Bar. Frame Right. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. one on the right. enter 80mm. Sill. enter 120mm. 40 Under Name. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . Right. for Height.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. under Specify a new Work Plane. For Frame Height Bottom. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. Center Post Left. For Center Post Width. Head. Under Other. and click OK. Center Post Right. Frame Left. click (Plane). and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. enter 1400mm. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. Frame Top. for Name. Frame Bottom. for Frame Depth. and click OK. Under Dimensions. 39 Click Apply. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior.

56 Click OK twice. 51 Click Modify. clear Coarse. The window frame is complete. and lock the alignment. select Frame/Mullion. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. double-click Ref. clear Plan/RCP. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Floor Plans. Level. 57 On the View Control Bar. and lock the alignment. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Edit. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 48 In the Project Browser. 52 On the Views toolbar. . 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane.47 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Tools toolbar. click (3D). 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. Under Detail Levels.

Level. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. you model each sash separately. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. 3 On the Views toolbar. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. 2 On the View Control Bar. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. click Family Types. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. under Name. 59 In the Family Types dialog. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. enter Sash Left Left. under Floor Plans. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . For Identity Data ➤ Name. and click Apply. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . However. double-click Ref. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Scale ➤ 1:10.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

Click OK. on the Options Bar. select Not a Reference. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. double-click Exterior. for Label. click Dimension. select Construction. For Identity Data ➤ Name. select Add Parameter. specify each dimension as 50mm. 15 Click Modify. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 16 Select the reference plane. For Group parameter under. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. 12 Using the same method. Click OK. select Sash Width. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. 9 Select the left dimension. enter Sash Width. Click OK. for Label.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. enter Sash Bottom. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. 11 Select the next dimension. select Not a Reference. 7 Using the same method.

27 Click Apply. Before you model the sash geometry. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . 28 For Name. for the temporary dimension. Specify it as Not a Reference. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. click Family Types. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. click . and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. for Sash Width. for Label. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. and click OK. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Tools toolbar. select both dimensions. for the temporary dimension. on the Options Bar. 26 Under Construction. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. select Sash Width. click (Align). The skeleton of the window sash is complete. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. 25 For Name. 21 Using the same method. enter 50mm. enter 70mm. enter 50mm. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 23 While pressing CTRL.

for Extents ➤ View Range. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. click (3D). Sash Right Left. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align).NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. 41 Using the same method. 37 In the View Range dialog. and click OK twice. click Finish Sketch. Frame Right. 43 On the Views toolbar. double-click Ref. Frame Bottom. Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. Level. 40 Click Modify. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 38 On the Tools toolbar. 34 In the Project Browser. and lock the alignment. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. Sash Right Right. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. and lock the alignment. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 42 Switch back to the Ref. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Edit. Sash Top. Sash Bottom. under Floor Plans. Center Post Right. enter 1500.

4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Add parameter. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . select Frame/Mullion.44 While pressing CTRL. for Graphics ➤ Visible. 47 Click OK twice. For Group Parameter under. Under Detail Levels. clear Coarse. click Edit. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. clear Plan/RCP. click Family Types. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Using the same method. select the 2 extrusions. click the rectangular button on the right side. enter Sash Right. 5 Click OK 3 times. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. select Construction. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. and click . 2 In the Element Properties dialog.

and name them Glass Axis Right. clear Sash Left. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. and click Apply. Click OK. Glass Axis Left. Glass Axis. Level. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. not aligned to reference planes. and Glass Axis Horizontal. 8 In the Project Browser.Test the family 8 For Name. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. 10 Under Construction. dimension the Insertion Edge. and Frame Interior reference planes. double-click Exterior. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. enter Glass Axis. 5 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 1 In the Project Browser. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. select Not a Reference. 6 Using one dimension string. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. 3 Select the reference plane. under Elevations.

This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. and click OK.10 For each of the new reference planes. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. 4 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . for Name. click (Plane). click . Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family.

and the right edge of the sketch. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. on the Options Bar. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. 11 Select the dimension line and. 13 Using the same method. enter Glass Length Right. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Other. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. For Group Parameter under. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Label. 8 Using the same method. dimension the left edge of the sketch. 7 Click EQ. select Add Parameter.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 6 Using one dimension string. click Dimension. Click OK. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.

For Graphics ➤ Visibility. 18 Click OK twice. clear Plan/RCP. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Finish Sketch. 21 On the Views toolbar. Under Detail Levels. enter 10. Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. For Extrusion Start. select Glass. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry.0.0. create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. click Edit. enter -10. click (3D). clear Coarse.14 On the Design Bar. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. However. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions.used to control families in many ways. as it will minimize performance hits. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set.22 On the View Control Bar. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. if you can build your family without using formulas. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. you should do it. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y.

Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . 4 Click Modify. under Floor Plans. on the Options Bar. 6 Select the dimension.OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . This would overconstrain the family. 8 . for the temporary dimension. For Group parameter under.(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. <result-if-true>. NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane. 8 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Level. 5' . Click OK. 3' . click Family Types. B = 3 ) . 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. enter 1000. IF ( Length < 45' . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 3 ) Simple IF .11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . For Type of Parameter. enter Width Sash Left. 2' 6" . 8 . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 9 In the Family Types dialog. IF ( Length < 55' . 8' ) ) ) IF ."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) .AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . select Add Parameter. click Dimension. 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . 2'-6". <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. under Parameters. 8 .6. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. select Length. y = 2). 3'-0" ) Simple IF . enter Width Sash Right. click Add. for Label. double-click Ref.

enter formulas: ■ Under Other.■ ■ For Group Parameter under. Height . Frame Width. 19 In the Family Types dialog. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. 11 In the Family Types dialog. Width Sash Left). Click OK.(Frame Width * 2) . Width Sash Left.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Test the family 13 Under Name. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog.Frame Height Top .Width Sash Left) . In the Formula row for Glass Height Right.2 * Sash Width). (Height .2 * Sash Width). and press ENTER. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . the new value is 560.Frame Height Top . enter if(Sash Left. ■ Click Apply. and Center Post Width. (Width Sash Left . 15 For Name. Width Sash Right).Frame Height Top . click Family Types. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. enter if(Sash Left. enter if(Sash Right. The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.2 * Sash Width). 17 For Name. for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula.Frame Height Bottom). select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. (Height . enter 400.Frame Height Bottom). The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. the new value is 880. enter if(Sash Right.Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. and click OK. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. Height . The value is greyed out. 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. select Dimensions. enter 1200.2 * Sash Width).Frame Height Bottom . ■ Click Apply. (Width Sash Right . in the Formula row for Glass Length Right.

select Elevation Swing [projection]. clear Chain. for Name. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. click Symbolic Lines. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Category. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. under Elevations. and lock all alignment constraints. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. click (Plane). 9 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. 4 In the Project Browser. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . 8 In the Type Selector. under Specify a new Work Plane. expand Windows. 3 Click OK. and click OK. They should be placed on a selected subcategory.

15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click in the Material column. and click OK three times. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. for Name. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. and click the button on the right side of the column. under Category. 6 In the Material Library dialog. 4 In the New Material dialog.11 In the drawing area. 16 Click OK twice. 13 While pressing CTRL. click . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter.Matte. you create material parameters for the frame. select the rectangular button on the right side. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. click Visibility. clear Coarse. and select Whites. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. for Name. 18 Save the file. select Default. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. 3 In the Materials dialog. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. and glass. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. and on the Options Bar. under AccuRender. If the subcategory already exists in the project. under Detail Levels. Next. select all symbolic lines. for Visible. enter Window Frame. 5 In the Materials dialog. while pressing CTRL. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. When you assign default materials in a family. 17 Using the same method. sash. 7 Select Cool. select Sash Right. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. unless the default value is < By Category >. and click . Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Graphics. and click Duplicate. and click OK. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. and click OK.

Open the families and explore the design of them. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. If this parameter is defined as shared. under Floor Plans. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. click the rectangular button on the right side. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. 10 Save the file. Creating Nested Families | 575 . click Training Files. 4 In the Project Browser. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. Level. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 6 Click OK three times. The default value is By Category. click (3D). The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. click Add parameter. In this lesson. You can override it on a type level. select Materials and Finishes. double-click Ref. For Group parameter under.1 On the Views toolbar. 7 Using the same method. you can switch between imported families of the same category. Using family type parameters in the main family. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. a Depth instance parameter. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. and click Open. click Family Types. 9 Click OK. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. When the family is loaded into a project. a Width type parameter. . Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. which nests them. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. enter Frame. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang.

and click . and is visible only in detail level Fine. has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. double-click Left. and click . The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. 6 In the Project Browser. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. and click Open. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. 12 Select the solid geometry. under Elevations. double-click View 1.rfa. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. under 3D views. 8 Click OK. 7 Select the solid geometry. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open.5 In the Project Browser. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family.

and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. 13 Click OK. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. 10 Click OK. 3 Using the same method. and verify that m_Metal Sill. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. You open the main family first. open m_Concrete Sill. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. and click Open. and then load families into the casement window family you have created.rfa. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa is cleared.rfa. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . 2 In the Open dialog. Reference Planes. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa. Parameters. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. select Casement Window.rfa is cleared. click Load into Projects. and is visible only in detail level Fine. click Load into Projects.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. select Casement Window.rfa -3D View: View1. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family.rfa. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. 8 On the Design Bar. navigate to Casement Window. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click OK.

you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. For Type of Parameter. As both sill families have been defined as Window families. click Add.rfa. enter Width . 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 13 Maximize Casement Window.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. Click OK. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. under Parameters. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. select Construction. double-click Concrete Sill. For Group parameter under. enter Sill Length. select Length. for Construction ➤ Sill Length.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. in the Formula column. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. 5 Click OK.rfa. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family.2* Wall Offset. click Family Types.

select Insertion Depth. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. 9 Click OK twice. 9 Click OK twice. click (Align). 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Sill Length. Level. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. for Dimensions ➤ Width. click the rectangular button on the right side. 2 On the View Control Bar. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. 10 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. you place the concrete sill in the project. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. for Dimensions ➤ Length. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . double-click Ref. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify. and click to place it. click the rectangular button on the right side.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. and click .

click Detail Level ➤ Fine. you add a Sill Type parameter. double-click View 1. align the bottom edge of the sill family. click (Align). 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family.12 Using the same method. under Elevations. double-click Left. 14 On the View Control Bar. TIP If the sill does not display. under 3D Views. 13 In the Project Browser. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 18 On the View Control Bar. and lock the alignment. The sill is placed in the desired position. click and spin the wall. and lock the alignment. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Tools toolbar.

16 Click OK twice. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 In the Save As dialog. enter Training Shared Parameter. click OK. select Metal Sill. click New. Under Type of Parameter. for Name. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. under Parameters.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. 2 In the Family Types dialog. If the family is then loaded into a project. 9 In the Select Category dialog. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Sill Type. select the Concrete Sill family. 18 On the Options Bar. under Parameters. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 10 Click OK 3 times. Testing Nested Families | 581 . 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Label. enter Windows. click Family Types. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Shared parameter. click New. select Constraints. and click OK. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. under Parameter Type. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. select <Family Type>. for Group parameter under. navigate to Training. click Add. 4 Under File name. under Groups. 3 Click Apply. select Windows. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. select Sill Type. and select Instance. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click Select. and click Save. click Create.

insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. 7 Using the same method. 8 On the Views toolbar. 3 On the Design Bar. and create a horizontal wall. click (3D). click the Window tool. This creates a new project with the default template. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. 6 In the Type Selector. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. click and spin the wall. 9 In the View Control Bar. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. click the Wall tool. 5 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Load into Projects. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .4 Click OK. click . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rfa -3D View: View 1. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. check all views at all levels of detail. TIP If the sill does not display.

drawer base.10 Select the smaller window. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. add the fields Mark. Height. select Metal Sill. and click OK. select Windows. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. and click OK. and drawers as extrusions. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. Click OK. enter Window Schedule with Sills. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . Under Name. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click . Note that the window sill has changed. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. Width. rolltop. You begin by creating the desktop.

Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown.Finally.rft. click Ref Plane. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Level. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . they represent the furniture centerline axes. 5 On the View menu. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. click Training Files. 4 Maximize the view. their exact location is not critical. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. click New ➤ Family. Floor Plan: Ref. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture.

proceeding to the centerline reference plane. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . as shown. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. and ending at the right reference plane. click Dimension.

11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. 13 Select the left reference plane.Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. click Dimension. as shown.15 On the Design Bar. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. as shown. and ending at the lower reference plane. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane.

select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Afterwards. horizontal reference plane.18 On the Design Bar. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 19 Select the upper. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP To do this. click Modify. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar.

.> for Label. Under Parameter Data. select <Add parameter. Select Type. Click OK. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . 24 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter.. select Dimensions. 27 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension... select <Add parameter. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. For Group parameter under. enter Length for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type.

click Family Types. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 31 In the Family Types dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Select Type. it will also adapt to the same changes. you can still see the model. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. select Dimensions. enter 3000 mm for Length. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. so when you open the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 30 On the Design Bar. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. enter Depth for Name. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Click OK. Click Apply. Therefore. For Group parameter under. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to.

8 On the Options Bar. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 2 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar.32 In the Family Types dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. select Level: Ref. and click OK. click . and enter 100 mm for Depth. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. click Lines. 7 On the Design Bar. Your lines may have a lighter weight. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Level for Name. click Symbolic Lines. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. and click to select all four symbolic lines. click . 33 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE In the image below. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise.

double-click Front. 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Dimension. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.10 On the Design Bar. and select the bottom edge. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. and select the top edge. click Finish Sketch. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop.

Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . Select Type. select <Add parameter. For Group parameter under. 22 On the Options Bar. as shown. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension.. Under Parameter Data. Select Type.> for Label. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under.> for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.. click Modify.. select Family parameter. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. enter Height for Name. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. enter Thickness for Name. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.. click Modify.

31 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. so when you open the Family Types dialog. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Family Types. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Level. you can still see the model. Enter 1200 mm for Height. under Floor Plans. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. click Ref Plane. double-click Ref. Click Apply. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 30 In the Family Types dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. and enter 100 mm for Offset. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click . and click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Height.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. click Dimension. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Click the lock icon as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimension as shown.

click Set Work Plane. 10 On the Design Bar. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. two lock icons display. 12 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. Level for Name.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. select Level: Ref. After you complete the rectangle. and click OK. as shown. click Lines. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click the Mirror tool. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . You can also highlight the entire line chain. click Dimension. 19 Select the four sketched lines.16 On the Design Bar. . Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 20 On the Tools toolbar. using the TAB key. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.

23 For the align-to reference. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. as shown below at the cursor. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown.A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .

click Dimension. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. 26 On the Design Bar. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.A lock icon displays. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 .

. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Select Type.> for Label. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Drawer Base Width for Name. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. as shown. Under Parameter Data.28 Add two final dimensions. For Group parameter under. 30 On the Options Bar.. select Dimensions. Click OK. select Family parameter.

34 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Front. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. under Elevations. 33 On the Options Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . click . click Finish Sketch. select Drawer Base Width for Label.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 35 On the Design Bar.

602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. After the alignment. 41 On the View toolbar. 45 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 42 On the View menu. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. you can still see the model. click it to lock the alignment. notice that annotations display in this view. click . However. click Visibility/Graphics. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. a lock icon displays. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. click the Scale control and select 1:20. 40 On the Design Bar.

50 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Click OK. Click Apply. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. and click Apply. double-click Right.47 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Enter 750 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . enter 2000 mm for Length. under Elevations. click Family Types. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 48 In the Family Types dialog. 49 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply.

click . click Set Work Plane. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. click Lines. click . 5 On the Design Bar. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 8 On the Tools toolbar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 9 Select the desk top. then the lower horizontal sketch line.2 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 6 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. and click to specify the upper left corner. and click OK. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 On the Design Bar. as shown.

and lock it.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. and lock it. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . and lock the alignment. 11 On the Design Bar. then select the right parallel sketch line. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. click Dimension.

click Lines. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the upper sketch line. 14 On the Options Bar.13 On the Design Bar. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click Finish Sketch. click the Fillet arc tool. . 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line.

select the left edge of the rolltop.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. under Elevations. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. select the right edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. click . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . double-click Front. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. 18 On the Tools toolbar.

Enter 200 mm for Thickness. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.21 On the View toolbar. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. you can still see the model. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click . Enter 1500 mm for Depth. and click Apply. and click Apply. If not. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Family Types dialog. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You can also use dimension constraints. The desk should adapt to all the changes. click Family Types.

Click OK. select Pick a Plane. Click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. Enter 1000 mm for Depth.25 In the Family Types dialog. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. under Specify a new Work Plane. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.

click Lines. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. 11 On the Tools toolbar. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. double-click Front. . select Multiple Alignment. click drawer set on the left. There should be four dimensions as shown. click . 14 On the Tools toolbar. Lock each dimension as you add it. zoom the view until you do. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 12 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. click . After selecting the line of an upper drawer. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. 9 On the Design Bar.5 In the Project Browser. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 7 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first.

click the Model Graphics Style control. click OK.Wood. and click OK. for Material. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. under AccuRender. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. under Constraints. click Extrusion Properties.15 On the Tools toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Duplicate. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. 16 On the Design Bar. click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 28 Click OK. Cherry. click 24 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 27 In the Material Library dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. 29 In the Materials dialog. click . click Finish Sketch. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 26 In the Materials dialog. enter Desk . Polished. Dark. and select Shading with Edges. 31 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click for Texture. 25 In the New Material dialog. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 .

and click Apply. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 33 On the Design Bar. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. click Family Types. Click OK. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. you can still see the model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 35 In the Family Types dialog. If not. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. 34 In the Family Types dialog. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. enter 2000 mm for Length. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612.

4 In the Family Types dialog. click New. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. 11 On the File menu. Training Furniture. and click OK. click Apply. under Family Types. 6 In the Name dialog. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. and click OK. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth.rfa. 18 In the Open dialog. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. 3 In the Name dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. click Load. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . and click Apply. click New. and click OK.rfa file. to start a new project based on your default template. select it. and click Open. click 14 On the View toolbar. 19 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. click New. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 17 On the Options Bar. click Family Types. 8 Under Family Types. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Save. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. click Component. 5 Under Family Types.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. and add the second desk. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. and click to add the third desk. 23 In the Type Selector.21 In the Type Selector. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks.

7 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. However. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. expand Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and double-click Ref. Drawing a Baluster | 615 .rft. their exact location is not critical.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 5 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. select Ref. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. and click OK. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. In the left pane of the New dialog. expand Views (all). 2 On the View menu. 4 On the Design Bar. Level. click Training Files. click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. click New ➤ Family. Level for Name.

4 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. The new custom baluster is now complete. click Training Files. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. click Stairs. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. By default. click New ➤ Project. 7 On the File menu. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.rte. click Finish Sketch.rfa. 14 Click the lock icon.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. click the Modelling tab. click . 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. double-click Front. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 12 On the Options Bar. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. click Modify and select the extrusion. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. click Modify and select the existing railing. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. and click Open. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 19 Click OK. click Orient ➤ Southwest. click Shading with Edges.rfa file. click OK. click . select it. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. under Baluster Family. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. 10 On the View menu. 11 On the View menu. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 9 On the View toolbar. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 .8 In the Open dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click OK. click Edit/New. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar.

click Training Files. Level is open. a railing. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Sweep. click New ➤ Family.rft. a stair nosing. under Floor Plans. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. soffits. click New ➤ Family. and a host sweep. cornices. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. verify that Ref. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. you create a rail profile. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection.rft. and other sweep-defined objects. balusters. you create five different profiles: a sweep. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. you draw a sweep profile. In this lesson.rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog. The new sweep profile is now complete. their exact location is not critical. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. In the left pane of the New dialog. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Training Files. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. click Lines. a reveal. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. However.

the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. click New ➤ Family. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. click Lines. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. However. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. you create a stair nosing profile. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. click Training Files.Rail. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . their exact location is not critical. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft. The new rail profile is now complete.rfa. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the New dialog.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template.

In the left pane of the New dialog. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. verify that Ref. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Level is open.Stair Nosing. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. you create a reveal profile. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. click Lines.rfa. However. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. In addition. click Training Files. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. under Floor Plans.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar.rft. click New ➤ Family. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. their exact location is not critical. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal.

3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. click New ➤ Family. you create a host sweep profile.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar.rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. The new reveal profile is now complete. Level is open. However. their exact location is not critical. verify that Ref. under Floor Plans. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. click Lines. which may be any vertical surface. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .Reveal.rft. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. click Training Files. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser.

with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. click Lines. 2 In the New Project dialog. click New ➤ Project. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. click Create. their exact location is not critical. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.rfa.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click OK. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. However. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). click Browse.Host Sweep.rte. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. The new host sweep profile is now complete. click Training Files. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.

navigate to the location of Profile . select Profile . beside Load Profiles.Sweep. click Finish Family. click . and click OK.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and double-click South. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. expand Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 16 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. 17 On the View toolbar. the exact location of the path is not critical. click Sketch 2D Path. click Load Profiles. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. and click Open. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. select Generic Models for Family Category. 15 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Name dialog. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. enter Sweep for Name. expand Views (all). 13 In the Open dialog. click Finish Sweep.rfa. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . select it. and click OK.Sweep.

click Finish Family.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. click Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click Wall. click Edit. 4 In the New Project dialog. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. click New ➤ Project. select Profile Is Flipped. 27 On the View toolbar. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. The sweep profile application is now complete. click OK. Under Other. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. on the Options Bar.rte. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. click . 23 Select the sweep profile again and. 2 In the New Project dialog. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 Click OK. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . on the Options Bar. 26 On the Design Bar. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. click Browse. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. 22 Select the sweep profile and. Under Constraints.

7 On the View toolbar. their exact location is not critical. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click .NOTE When you draw the walls. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. verify that Horizontal is selected. 6 Draw four walls as shown. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

click OK. under Construction. click Modify. click Training Files. click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. select it. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.Host Sweep for Profile. 15 Select the wall sweep and. 19 On the View toolbar. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. and area with labels added to extract project data. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .12 On the Design Bar.rfa. and click OK. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.Host Sweep. navigate to the location of Profile .Host Sweep : Profile . on the Options Bar. you specify the room tag parameters. and click Open. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. floor and ceiling finish. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click Edit/New. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Spin [Shift]. you create a room tag which displays room name. .rft. 14 In the Open dialog. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag. select Profile . Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.

click Label. and click OK. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Underline. select Name. and click OK. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. select Ceiling Finish. select Underline. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. 7 In the Type properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 16 Zoom in on the label. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 2mm for Name. click Label. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. select Label : 2mm.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. select Floor Finish. click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select Area. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Duplicate. 13 On the Options Bar. click . 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. 12 In the Type Selector.

Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.rfa. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. notice that there is only one view available. The new room tag is now ready for use. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . In the left pane of the New dialog. click . 3 On the Options Bar.rft. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Lines.

click . 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . click Modify.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 10 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. 4 In the New Project dialog. Training North Arrow.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. click Browse. and select the upper vertical line. enter North Line for Name. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. select North Line. select 3 for Line Weight. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click New. and click OK. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rte. 7 Click OK. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. in the North Line row. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. and click OK. click Sheet. click OK. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. select A1 metric. 16 In the Type Selector. under Modify Subcategories. click Modify. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. click Object Styles. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the File menu. click Training Files. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click New ➤ Project. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name.rfa. 17 On the Design Bar.

The titleblock has linework.rfa. 12 In the Type Selector. You customize the titleblock with a new text style.10 In the Open dialog. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. 14 On the Design Bar. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . click Symbol. select it. click Training Files. click Modify. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click New ➤ Titleblock. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. and labels. In the left pane of the New dialog. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rft. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. and your project data. graphics. text. and click Open. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. select Training North Arrow.

and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter 140 for Offset. 3 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. 7 On the Options Bar. click . Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. click Lines.Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. click . and click . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. and enter -25 for Offset.

13 In the Type Selector. and enter 20 for Offset. select Wide Lines. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 17 On the Options Bar. enter 30 for Offset. 21 On the Options Bar. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. press CTRL. click Lines. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. click . click Modify. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 25 On the Design Bar.12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector. select Title Blocks. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line.

jpg. you add a company logo. click Text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. and open Common\Company Logo. 6 On the Options Bar. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. text notes. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files.The titleblock linework is now complete. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. click Import/Link ➤ Image. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and labels to your titleblock. 4 Zoom in on the logo. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. click .

13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 17 On the Design Bar. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. enter 10mm Bold for Name. under Text. and select the last text note. enter 10 for Text Size. and add an address and phone number as shown. and click OK. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. select Text : 8mm.9 In the Name dialog. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 11 Click OK twice. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 18 Select the drag handle. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and select Bold. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . in the text box. click Modify. and drag the text note down as shown.

25 Click inside the Consultant text group. Add consultant name. click . 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Constrain and Multiple. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. address.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. click Text. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and select the consultant text note.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 . 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

33 In the Type Properties dialog. and enter Checked By:. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and enter Drawn By:. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 32 In the Name dialog. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Text. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Date:. under Text. click . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click OK twice. enter 5mm for Name. and enter Sheet Number:.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. click Duplicate. select Text : 5mm. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and click OK. click Edit/New. enter 5 for Text Size.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. select Project Issue Date. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 41 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. and click to specify the label location. click Label. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog.

60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and click to specify the label location. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 59 On the Options Bar. enter 15 for Text Size. and click OK. select Project Number. and click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 Click OK twice. select Checked By and click OK. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Duplicate. select Drawn By. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. under Text. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location. click . and click to specify the label location. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select Label : 15mm Label. select Sheet Number. and click to specify the label location. click Label.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. 50 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 15mm Label for Name. 53 In the Name dialog. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. click Center and Middle. and click OK. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector.

65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click OK. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and click to specify the label location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and click to specify the label location. and click OK. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Label. select Project Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Client Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. enter 4 for Text Size. click Left and Middle. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. click . select it. 73 In the Name dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. and labels are now complete.rfa file.70 On the Options Bar. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Sheet. 7 In the Open dialog. enter 4mm Label. 9 Click OK. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. select 4mm Label. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Load. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 4 In the New Project dialog. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 75 Click OK twice. The titleblock graphics. 80 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Project. under Text. and click Open. and click OK. 77 On the Options Bar.rte. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rfa. click Edit/New. select File Path. click Browse. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. text. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. click OK. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Training Files. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Enter Office Building for Project Name. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 15 In the Type Properties dialog.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 . Enter In Progress for Project Status. and click OK. 14 On the Settings menu. click Modify and select the titleblock. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. click Project Information. 11 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. under Other. enter Name for Drawn By. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click .

You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor.rvt. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Set the Length units to millimeters. and open Common\c_Pantheon. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Orient ➤ Southeast. set the Area to Square meters. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. To change the units of measurement to meters. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. and set the suffix to None. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. format the Area to use 2 decimal places.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. click Project Units. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. on the Settings menu. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families.

and click OK.Center. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. expand Elevations. 7 On the Design Bar.Next. and double-click South. 8 In the Work Plane dialog. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Name dialog. select Pick a Plane. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and click OK. enter Dome for Name. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. select Roofs for Family Category. expand Views (all). and click Open View. select Section: Wall Section . 10 In the Go To View dialog.

click . click Lines. click Axis. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar.The center wall section view is displayed. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 12 On the Options Bar. 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click .

click . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. and select Chain. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle.17 Move the cursor out. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.

Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click . 27 On the Options Bar. click . 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. select Delete Inner Segment.

35 Select the interior face of the wall. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. 32 On the Options Bar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. click and select Chain. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click Lines. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. click . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar.

42 On the View toolbar. click . click Finish Family. and click OK. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Design Bar. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. select Floors for Family Category.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. and click OK. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. click OK. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click for Material. click Revolution Properties. 38 In the Materials dialog. click Create. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. under Materials and Finishes. select Concrete . 40 On the Design Bar.

click Axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 5 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section . 7 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 9 In the Go To View dialog. click Set Work Plane. select Pick a Plane. double-click South. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar.Center. 11 On the Options Bar.3 In the Name dialog. click . 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. enter Concave Floor for Name. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . and click Open View. and click OK. and click OK.

652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .O. click . 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. and select Chain. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. Footing level line and the axis. 14 On the Options Bar. click Lines.

click Finish Sketch. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. you start with the selection of a family template. the new family has specific default contents. Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. 22 In the Materials dialog. click for Material. double-click 3D Section View. and click OK.O. click Finish Family. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. annotation families. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. Appendix A .O. Based on the template you select. Appendix A . 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T.18 Specify the intersection of the T. When you create a new family. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. click OK.Exploring Family Templates | 653 . and title blocks. such as reference planes and sub-categories. click Revolution Properties. select Cobblestone for Name. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar.

The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. Contains sample wall geometry. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework.Post Family template for posts of balusters. Category: None Baluster .Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework.

Includes the filled region tool. the column inherits the material of the wall.Template Name *.rft Description Column Family template to create columns. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. includes the filled region tool. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. is used to create 2D detail components. If a column intersects a wall. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls.

Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.rft Door . Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Template Name *. Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project. Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors.

Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families.Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families.

Contains sample floor geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project.Template Name *. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.

Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes.Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Contains sample roof geometry. Includes the filled region tool. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Model Family Templates | 659 . Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry.

Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample roof geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains sample floor geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.

The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Contains sample wall geometry.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures.

Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Masses can report gross volume. and gross floor areas. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. slabs.Template Name *.rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. gross surface area. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls.

Template Name *. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 . Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample wall geometry.

Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. Profile usage (fascia. gutter. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. mullion. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. slab edge.Template Name *. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles. Category: Profiles. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . A profile is only used in combination with system families. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. Category: Profiles.

rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families. Category: Profiles. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. A profile is used only in combination with system families.Template Name *. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 . Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families. The family has an rpc file link included. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Contains sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.

Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. such as beams and braces. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. Beams can be placed on structural columns. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. If a structural column intersects a wall. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. the column cuts out the wall. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols.

Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side. such as trusses. Category: Structural Framing Window .Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls.Template Name *.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing . Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 .Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.

Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. Symbol size. Thus. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads.Template Name *. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. and parameters. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.0mm has a size of 2. text size. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. filled regions. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. Annotation families are scale-dependent. text.rft Window Description Family template for windows. parameter text created with a text height of 2.0mm on a plotted sheet. Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Annotation families consist mainly of lines.

17 x 11. You import images to your title block. all loaded title block families are listed for selection. In a project.rft ■ C . Imperial ■ A .rft ■ A1 metric. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border.42 x 30.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet. text.36 x 24.11 x 8.rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 .Template Name *.5. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks.rft Metric ■ A0 metric.rft ■ A3 metric. the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rft ■ D .rft ■ A2 metric. In the Select a Titleblock dialog. filled regions. Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.rft ■ B .rft ■ A4 metric.24 x 18.rft ■ E1 .rft ■ New Site Metric. and parameters. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

assigned subcatecories. In exercises that become increasingly complex. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. During this tutorial. and detail level controls. not specifically how to make a floor truss. In this case.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. The truss also has multiple types. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. formula-based parameters. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. you will understand the process. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. At the end of this tutorial. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. 671 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. methodology.

the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. and structural walls. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. This decision dictates which family template you begin with.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. Two types should be created. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. you should avoid over-designing the component. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. and also works intuitively with them. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. In the next exercise. It should also be an available option within a beam system. a generic floor-based component might work. In this case. For training purposes. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. NOTE When creating a new family. Take this into consideration during your design planning. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. For every complexity added to a family. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. you determine the requirements of the new component. In this lesson. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. In addition. it is not the best solution. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. In this case. this must be a structural beam component. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. Although this solution is possible. beams.

would require Instance or Type parameters. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. In addition. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. Depending on the family you are designing. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. 4 Continue with the next exercise. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . you determined that the component type is a structural beam. In the previous exercise. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. such as wood type. the planning stage and questions may differ. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. You have completed the planning stage for the new family.

the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. 4 Scroll through the various template options.rft. click Training Files. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates. On the right side of the New dialog. for example: wall based or floor based. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In addition. scroll to the structural framing templates. this is where you access family templates. Like most generic family templates.Beams and Braces. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Notice that most of the template names include the component type. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. Usually. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. 6 In the New dialog. However. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. notice the preview. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. There are two structural framing templates provided. you will access them from the Training Files folder. Select it so that the preview displays.

■ Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview. Level. spacing. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components.Complex and Trusses. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.rft. Floor Plan: Ref. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 .This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing .rft to open it. Floor Plan: Ref. This template is the best starting point for the new family. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).Beams and Braces.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. 10 Maximize the view. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Because of its simplicity. and notice the preview. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.Complex and Trusses. and display functions required by structural beams.

using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. you add the reference planes. Level. Like many templates. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. under Floor Plans. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. under Elevations. you add reference planes to the beam design. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. under 3D Views. 12 In the Project Browser. lines. double-click Front. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 11 In the Project Browser. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. double-click Ref. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Reference Plane: Left. however.In this view. Therefore.

■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. notice the location of the beam extents. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. In the project plan view image below. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. In the image below. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below.

Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. click Ref Plane. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. click . Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. Before adding new reference planes. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. In a later exercise.

These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task.Add ref. 10 On the Design Bar. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. Level. Level. To do this. and select the Level: Ref. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. click Ref Plane. double-click Front. click to place it. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. Level as the mirror axis. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . click Ref Plane. click . and specify an Offset of 38 mm. click on the Edit toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 13 On the Design Bar.

18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click to place it as shown. Before you move on to the next exercise. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. specify an Offset of 200 mm. 19 On the Options Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords.

and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 22 On the Options Bar. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Adding Reference Planes | 681 . Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. Level. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. double-click Ref. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. which you do in the next exercise. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 238 mm.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). under Floor Plans. click to place it as shown. 24 In the Project Browser.

NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 28 In the Save As dialog. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. and click Save. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. click Modify. navigate to the folder of your choice. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. Make sure you remember where you saved it. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton.25 On the Design Bar. In the following exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry.

click Modify.rfa. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Wood Floor Truss. click Dimension.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . click Dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. 2 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click . 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 6 On the Design Bar. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. After adding the dimension. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines.

Level. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. under Elevations. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and the lower horizontal reference plane.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. the Center reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. Place the dimension as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

and place it below the dimension you added previously. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. add two dimensions as shown.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase.

Level. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. In addition. double-click Ref. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . consider making it a type parameter. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. under Floor Plans. Throughout the tutorial.rfa. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Wood Floor Truss. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. If the component has material that varies per component. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. you will add additional reference planes. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. When you design a new family. and constraints as needed. consider making it an instance parameter. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. it becomes a parameter. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. In this exercise. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. dimensions. In the next exercise. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. consider making it a type parameter. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes.

Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Click OK. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Under Parameter Data. ■ Click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. enter Chord Width for Name. double-click Front.3 On the Options Bar. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Add parameter for Label. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Add parameter for Label. Under Parameter Data. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . select Family parameter. Select Type. select Family parameter. enter Depth for Name.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

5 On the Options Bar. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. 2 In the Project Browser. verify that Chain is not selected. a slab. The rim joist was added as a beam. right-click in the Design Bar.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D . and click Structural. This project consists of foundation walls. and a wood rim joist. expand Views. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 . 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. therefore. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. under Floor Plans. click Beam.Southeast Isometric. a wood sill. expand 3D Views.

double-click Level 1. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You do not need to be precise. under Floor Plans. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. not the wall or rim joist. 7 In the Project Browser. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown.Southeast Isometric. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. double-click 3D . under 3D Views.

click Save as. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. 12 On the File menu. 13 In the Save as dialog. In the next lesson. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. under 3D Views.10 In the Project Browser. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. 11 On the Edit menu. This should return the project to its original dimension. click Undo Drag. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.Southeast Isometric. double-click 3D . Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 .

click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. click Edit Family. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. 4 On the View Control Bar. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. double-click Ref. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. Because the family is already open. click Hide/Isolate. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Level. 17 Proceed to the next lesson.rfa. under Floor Plans.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. 15 On the Options Bar. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. 5 On the File menu. click Yes. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Training Files.rfa is the active file. and click Hide Element.

In the following steps. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. 13 For the align-to point. under Elevations. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. 9 On the Design Bar. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. This will make aligning the wood web easier. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click Front. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. Do not select it. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web.This family is a single extrusion as shown. 7 In the Type Selector. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. You will align the left web component first. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. click Component.

click Ref Plane. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. click Modify. In addition. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. 18 Add two reference planes as shown.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 16 On the Design Bar.

20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point.19 On the Tools menu. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. In the steps that follow. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. click Align. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. click Dimension.

Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Place the dimension as shown. you add new parameters to control the web components. length. 27 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. click Add. click Family Types. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. click Modify. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. under Parameters. or the width of the center chase. ■ In the next exercise. Place the dimension as shown. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Save As dialog. click Save As. you label these dimensions. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the Design Bar.

Select Common for Discipline. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 12 On the Design Bar. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. 5 Click OK. select WebDepth. Select Length for Type. click OK. click Edit/New. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. Click OK. and click OK. In addition. under Constraints. Select Type. and click Element Properties. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. enter Depth . click Modify. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. under Parameter Data. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

<result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog.rvt. select 64x38. 21 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. 400))) 6 Click Apply. 20 On the Design Bar. click Beam. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. click Edit Family. if(Length < 7500. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. select 89x38. 400. 18 In the Type Selector. click Family Types. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. double-click 3D . click Modify. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. select Override parameter values of existing types. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. click Save. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . and click OK. select m_WWF3. under Dimensions. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. if(Length < 9000. 286. 14 In the Reload Family dialog.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. 350. <result-if-true>. click Load into Projects. 16 In the Type Selector. 22 On the File menu. and click Yes. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. Notice the two beam types.

double-click Level 1. and click OK. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. click Load into Projects. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. double-click 3D . click Save. under 3D Views. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. 14 In the Project Browser. 16 On the File menu.Southeast Isometric. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. under Floor Plans. 17 Close any open files. enter 8000 for length.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth.rvt. 8 In the Family Types dialog. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. Notice the truss depth increases. 11 In the Reload Family dialog. You have completed this tutorial. select Override parameter values of existing types. enter 6000 for length. and click Yes. click Apply. select m_WWF3.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

743 . They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. to resize the system. This affects the entire curtain system. grid lines. To change grids. and they are not windows. Like walls. Like windows. and you can change these elements individually. or you can use a specific curtain system command. and mullions. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Unlike windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. For example.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. panel. To switch panel types. you select the grid. you need to change the length of the wall. you need to select a panel. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. A typical curtain system comprises a wall.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. you create a curtain system using the wall command. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 1 In the Project Browser. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls.rvt. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Ground Floor.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating an Entrance | 745 . and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor.

using curtain grids. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. enter 1200. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. Click OK. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. For Top Offset. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and click (Properties).11 Select the curtain system. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. and room bounding. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . top constraint. top and base attachments. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint.

29 In the Select Levels dialog. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. click Curtain Grid. while pressing CTRL. FOURTH FLOOR. and click OK. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1 . and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. THIRD FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. select SECOND FLOOR. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Elevation. 26 While pressing CTRL. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and resize the crop boundary as shown. SIXTH FLOOR.a. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and click Rename. Creating an Entrance | 747 . and SEVENTH FLOOR.

click Modify. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. Click to create a vertical grid. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . one larger than the other. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to place another grid line.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel.

and then select the segment above it. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. The two segments are removed. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Creating an Entrance | 749 . 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. The segment line style changes to dashed. you add a doorway to the curtain system. and on the Options Bar. Instead of using the Door command. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.Next.

click Curtain Grid. select One Segment.38 Using the same method. 39 On the Design Bar. and lock them. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. Use the following image as a guide.43 Delete the dimensions. 52 On the Type Selector. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click in any white space to exit the editor. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. Next. click Training Files. The panel changes to a double door. Creating an Entrance | 751 . The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. click Modify. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel.rfa. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 54 On the Design Bar. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.

752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Next. click System Panel : Solid. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. and the solid panels display in white. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Now. double-click Entrance Elevation. 60 On the Type Selector. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. click . 55 In the Project Browser. This changes the graphics style of the view. under Elevations. 63 Click OK twice. The glazed panels display in blue. not as curtain panels. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. They are part of the curtain panel category. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. and click Wireframe. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 65 On the View Control Bar. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click . on the new curtain system you added. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 61 With the panel still selected. under Floor Plans.These panels schedule as doors. 57 On the View Control Bar. 56 In the Project Browser. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level.

4 On the Options Bar. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. select Entire Grid Line. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.rvt. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click Save As. select Grid Line Segment. 68 On the File menu.

11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar.6 On the Options Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. there are a few that you do not want. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. You are going to change some mullion joins. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. so you remove them next. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. select All Empty Segments. Two mullion join controls display. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. however. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them.

you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Finally. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 15 In the Project Browser. Curved Curtain System | 755 . you can also right-click. you add a curtain system using the wall command. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. Finally. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 13 Click the top mullion control. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. click Modify. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 14 On the Design Bar. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 16 Save the file. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system.

double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Wall. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . (Arc passing through three points). 9 Place the second point at the lower right side.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 1200. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 5 Click . select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 4 In the Type Selector. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Click OK. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Top Offset. for Top Constraint. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall.

and then sixteenths. under Elevations. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Next.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 14 In the Project Browser. eighths. click Modify. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. you place grids on the system. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Next. you change some panels in the system. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. You are going to use one of these snaps points. click Curtain Grid. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . double-click East. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Divide the halves into quarters.

758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 4 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. enter 100. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. click Lines. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. double-click Exterior. 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. select the bottom layer of panels. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.rft.300mm. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click . 3 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Depth.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. select Basic Wall: Generic .

rfa family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . select Curtain Panel . 11 On the Design Bar. and return to the project file. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. clear Chain.rfa. and click . 12 On the Options Bar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 .Pattern. right-click. 21 In the Type Selector. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Lines. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.8 On the Design Bar. and save the family as Curtain Panel . and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. All fourth floor panels are selected. select Glass. 19 In the Project Browser. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.Pattern.Pattern. 14 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. and click OK.

double-click FIFTH FLOOR. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). under Floor Plans. All the panels change to the solid panel. select System Panel . 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 26 In the Project Browser. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . right-click. 24 On the View toolbar. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 29 Save the file. click (Default 3D View). The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All fifth floor panels are selected.Solid. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 23 Right-click. and click Flip Orientation. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 28 In the Type Selector.

click Lines. and select it. For vertical mullions. click ■ ■ For Sides. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. . 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. double-click East. under Elevations. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 8. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . click Training Files. for Profile Usage. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Select Radius. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. and click OK. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.rft. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. select Mullion. click Mullion.

31 In the Element Properties dialog. After the new profile is loaded. 19 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. clear Fine. 20 Select the detail component. click Mullion.rfa. and return to the project file. 27 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. and click Visibility. double-click Southeast Isometric.rfa.11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 30 Click . click Detail Component. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click Visibility. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. clear Coarse and Medium. click Modify. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. it can be added as a mullion type.detail. select Circular Mullion for Family. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 28 Click . 17 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.rfa family. 13 On the Options Bar. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 12 Select the lines in the octagon.

and click OK. right-click. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. so you remove the unwanted ones. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . click Duplicate. under Floor Plans. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 39 On the Design Bar. and then apply those custom elements to the system. select All Empty Segments. 35 Under Construction. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.32 Click Edit/New. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. for Profile. 37 On the Options Bar. 43 Save the file. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. you learned to create a curved curtain system. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 36 Click OK twice. In this lesson. 40 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 42 Press DELETE. click Modify. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. You have placed more mullions than you want.

and a ruled curtain system.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. TIP To chain select all the walls. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. enter 600. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. All the inside faces highlight. Click OK. select Defines slope. and you can click to select them all. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. a storefront system. under Floor Plans. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and press TAB.

you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. under 3D Views. 18 Save the file. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 1 In the Project Browser. Storefront System In this exercise. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. click Mullion. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 16 On the Design Bar.10 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click GROUND FLOOR. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. select Entire Grid Line. click Modify. Storefront System | 765 . 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. click Wall. and enter 2400. 5 On the Options Bar. select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 4 In the Type Selector. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.

and click . To see how the grid layout is defined. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. enter 10200 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click Edit/New. 9 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 8 Click the temporary dimension. even if the wall height changes. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Modify. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 10 In the Project Browser. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. Storefront System | 767 . This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. which is specified in the type. For this wall. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views.

double-click Southeast Isometric. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and Offset. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. center.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Angle. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. see the Revit Architecture help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. or end. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 18 On the Options Bar. By setting the Angle value. under 3D Views. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. select All Empty Segments. 19 Select a curtain grid. In this exercise. 16 Click OK. you find Number. 20 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. click Mullion. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 15. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Justification. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise.

3 On the View Control Bar. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. and highlight the model line. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.

you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. Next. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. click Curtain Grid. 11 Click OK. 10 Select the panel. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 9 On the Design Bar. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. click Modify.8 Select the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. and then eighths. quarters. and click .

and then eighths.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 18 Save the file. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . select System Panel : Solid. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. right-click. 16 In the Type Selector. quarters. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and define a ruled curtain system. Finally.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

In addition.Roofs 19 In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. gutters. 773 . and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to add fascia.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and click OK. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. including hip.rvt. Before you can sketch the roof profile. and open Metric\m_Roofs. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click OK. shed. gable. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 1. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . select Name. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you learn to create several different types of roofs. and mansard roofs. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. In this lesson. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.Creating Roofs In this lesson. click Training Files. You do not need to create the work plane. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 3 In the Work Plane dialog.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. centerline. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click the blue square on the witness line. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . and so on).The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. click Ref Plane. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions.

14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. select Chain. sketch the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs .11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. click Lines. Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.

Next. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. The roof should resemble the following illustration. click to display the model. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click .The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click . Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . 19 On the Tools toolbar. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. press TAB. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 16 On the View toolbar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.

21 In the Project Browser. and select the second wall. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Type 1). 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. expand Views (all). 24 On the Options Bar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Attach for Top/Base. and double-click Section 1. click Modify. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. press CTRL. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.

and on the Options Bar. By default. click Modify. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . The Element Properties dialog is displayed.rvt. click Pick Walls. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. 6 On the Options Bar. click . the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify that Defines slope is selected. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. and enter 600 for Overhang. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. m_Roofs. 3 On the Options Bar.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 9 Press CTRL. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. clear Defines slope. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. select both slope definition lines.

and double-click Level 3. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 11 On the Design Bar. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. 1 In the Project Browser. under Dimensions. m_Roofs.rvt. expand Floor Plans. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and enter 600 for Overhang. 12 When you see the informational dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. When you complete the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.10 In the Element Properties dialog. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and click OK. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 3 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 13 On the View toolbar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.

14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. press TAB. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening. click Modify. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click Lines. Next. add new slope lines to the roof.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 10 On the View menu. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . click . 6 Click to select all the walls. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. select Defines Slope. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.

expand Floor Plans. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and double-click Level 2. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. click Finish Roof. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. close the roof sketch.rvt. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Options bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. select Defines Slope. 18 On the View toolbar. click to view the new roof in the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 17 When you see the informational dialog. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 3 On the Options Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. Next.

select the left vertical slope definition line. Next. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and click .6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 7 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. click to display the model. 9 On the Tools toolbar. clear Defines Slope. click . 14 Under Constraints. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. using the following illustration for guidance. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. and click OK. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . 10 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click Finish Roof. 16 On the View toolbar. 11 To trim the first line segment. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. click Lines. Next.

19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Modify. click . 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. 23 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. Next. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof.

and enter 300 for Overhang.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. press TAB. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2. expand Views (all). enter 0 for Overhang.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Defines Slope. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . click Pick Walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785.

786 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select the left vertical roof line. click Modify. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and press ENTER. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. click . 10 To trim the first line segment. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 16 Under Constraints. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. you add a slope-defining line. 13 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. select Defines slope. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level.

click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 9 On the Tools menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. clear Defines Slope. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Before you can add slope arrows. Next. click . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . expand Views (all). Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. 5 On the View menu. 7 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Split Walls and Lines. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and enter 600 for Offset. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2. expand Views (all). 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 14 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. To help locate the position of each split.rvt. expand 3D Views. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. add two new slope arrows. 1 In the Project Browser. you need to add two reference planes. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration.21 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3D. verify is selected. m_Roofs. 3 On the Options Bar. click Slope Arrow. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. Next.

23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. and double-click Garage Roof. 18 Press CTRL. click Edit. expand Floor Plans. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. select Defines Slope. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). m_Roofs. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. select both slope arrows. 20 Under Dimensions. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. and move the cursor to place the arrow. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rvt. When eave heights differ. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 5 On the Options Bar. select Slope for Specify.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click 19 Under Constraints. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. expand Views (all). the adjacent eave heights must align. When you sketch a hip roof.15 to add the second slope arrow. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. . enter 500 for Rise/1000. 3 On the Options Bar. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 .

under Dimensions. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. on the File menu. and click OK. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. Next. select a method to align the eaves. When aligning eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click . 14 If you want to save your changes. click Finish Roof. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Align Eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 10 On the Options Bar. The eave lines display with a dimension. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.6 With the two gable end lines selected. on the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . 13 On the View toolbar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click to display the model. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Modify. 6 On the View toolbar. expand Elevations. 3 Select the roof and. 1 In the Project Browser. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. click Training Files. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Options Bar. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. and double-click North. click . click to display the model. under Constraints. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . expand Views (all).Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click OK. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof.Next. and soffits in Revit Architecture. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. press TAB. gutters. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. you learn how to create roof fascia. under Dimensions. 18 If you want to save your changes. 17 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. Gutters. and Soffits | 791 . and select the remaining three lines. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. gutters. Creating Fascia. click Modify. and Soffits In this lesson. expand Views (all). on the File menu. expand Floor Plans. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can easily create its fascia. and soffits. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click Save As. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and then select Defines slope. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Lines. click . 7 In the Project Browser. Gutters. After you create a roof. Creating Fascia. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. click Training Files.rvt. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and click Open. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Duplicate. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. enter Built-up Fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Press CTRL. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. under Construction. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. 8 In the Name dialog.

under Construction. 3 In the Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK three times. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. click Duplicate. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name.rvt. c_Condominium. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 10 Click to place the gutter. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. Creating Gutters | 793 . and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. click . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 7 Under Materials and Finishes.13 On the Design Bar. . click in the Value field for Material. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. select Metal-Aluminum for Name.

and double-click Roof. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rvt.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 4 Select the roof. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Roofs. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. expand Views. c_Condominium. Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.

expand 3D Views. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 6 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 If you want to save your changes. click Join Geometry. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 8 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them. and double-click 3D. Creating Soffits | 795 . click Save As. expand Views (all).5 On the Design Bar. on the File menu. 7 On the Tools menu.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Finally. 797 . Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.

under Length. and click Room and Area. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 3 Under Area. expand Views (all). click the Area Schemes tab. Click OK. If you are using metric units. your values will be different. click OK. select Millimeters. select m2 Click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. For Unit Suffix. select 2 decimal places. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 2 In the Project Units dialog. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. For Unit Suffix. click Settings. In the final exercise. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Area.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. click Training Files. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. select Square meters. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. select mm. These schemes define spatial relationships. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. For Rounding. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Project Units. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.

Click OK. If you select No. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. forming a closed loop. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. 13 In the Project Browser. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. When you select Yes in this dialog. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 9 Click Cancel. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you must manually add these boundary lines. click Area Plan. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . under Views (all). or 0.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. the system-computed height defaults to the level. it is not necessary in this exercise. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click the Room Calculations tab. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 12 When the informational dialog displays. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level.

15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. rather than the area tag. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. To modify the area. Click OK. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and store area. you create a new area plan for rentable space. you must select one of the reference lines. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. click Area Plan. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. click Area. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. common areas. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Next.

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. If you do not select this option. click Area Boundary. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. When you add area boundary lines. click Area. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. you can either draw them or pick them. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. When you pick the walls. 23 On the Design Bar. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable).Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 31 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click . 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. and click to select the area. 27 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . click Area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 32 On the Options Bar.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the area.

36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Click OK. enter Core for Name. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Office area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Add an area to the building model core. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name.33 In the Element Properties dialog.

37 On the File menu. and click Save. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Save. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.rvt. click Color Scheme Legend. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. In the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click to place the legend.Notice that within the two store areas. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In this exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

9 Click OK. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Areas (Rentable). 7 Under Available fields. select Area Type and click Add. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 8 Add the fields Area and Name.3 When the dialog displays. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . and click OK. under Category.

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. If you modify a massing face. In this tutorial. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. floors. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. 807 . You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After you make building elements. and roofs. curtain systems. you can specify the view to display massing elements. At any time. or both. building elements. you then need to update the building face.

floor. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Massing. and floors.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. You assign the default wall. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Create Mass. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. click Training Files. roofs. 5 On the Design Bar. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. under Views (all). 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . sweeps. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. and cutting geometry.

12 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. double-click Level 1. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Finish Sketch. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. and click OK. 10 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click the Value for Material. 13 On the View toolbar. and click 17 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and then click . enter 25000 for Extrusion End. and click OK. on the Options Bar. under Views (all). Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click . 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. click Lines.

810 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. click the Value for Material. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. and then click . double-click {3D} to see the results. TIP If necessary. click Finish Sketch. 29 In the drawing area. select Pick a plane. 30 Click to select the face. under Materials and Finishes. under Views (all). 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. click Extrusion Properties. double-click West. and click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 25 In the Project Browser. highlight the larger form. and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 22 In the Materials dialog. The second form is on top of the first form. press TAB to highlight the entire face.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion.

Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. click Lines. 36 On the Options Bar. 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click on the Options Bar.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. TIP If you do not see this option. and click to select the line start point. click . 33 On the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . click . 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Next. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.

and delete the vertical construction line. 44 In the Project Browser. click Lines and. click Edit Top. click Modify. . . under Elevations (Building Elevation). click 48 Create an arc as shown. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. on the Options Bar. 45 On the Design Bar. double-click East. 47 On the Options Bar. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing .38 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click . under Views (all). 40 On the Edit toolbar. click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar.

you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. In the next exercise. 51 On the Design Bar. and click OK. In this exercise. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click Blend Properties. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise.49 On the Design Bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . 52 On the View toolbar. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. click Finish Sketch. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End.

click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 1 In the Project Browser. and then click Hidden Line. 15 On the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. When sketching each extrusion. and 0 for Extrusion Start.rvt. select the mass. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. double-click Level 1. 2 In the drawing area. 7 Using the same technique. 14 Click OK. m_Massing_Start. click Finish Sketch. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. snap the corners to the intersections. 9 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. on the Options Bar. 4 On the Options bar. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. as shown. under Floor Plans. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click Ref Plane. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click and select Chain. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Under Constraints. click and enter 15000 for Offset. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Lines and. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. on the View Control Bar.

17 On the Mass Design Bar. click Save As. enter 15000 mm for Width. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.rvt.16 On the View toolbar. 3 In the Name dialog. Finally. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Apply. In this exercise. you create new family types from a mass family file. click Finish Mass. click . and 18000 mm for Depth. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name.rfa. 4 In the Family Types dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 18 On the File menu. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 12000 mm for Height. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click Family Types. under Other. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . click New. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. and click OK. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 2 In the Family Types dialog. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.

and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. You also load other existing mass families and place them. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rfa. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. click Training Files. click Save As. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. 10 On the File menu. and click Apply. 1 If not already selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click Apply. and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 9 Click OK. and click OK. 11000 mm for Height.rvt. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. and 6000 mm for Depth. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. and 9000 mm for Depth. In this exercise. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. 18000 mm for Height.

rfa.rfa. 25 In the drawing area. 11 Select the box. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. click Modify. select the triangle. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 90 for Angle. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and click . and click to place the mass. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . 17 Press CTRL. 8 In the Type Selector. click Training Files.2 In the Project Browser. click Place Mass. 24 On the Design Bar.rfa family files. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Semi Barrel Vault. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. under Views (all). 3 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. click Place Mass. 20 In the Type Selector. and click . 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area.rfa. and Triangle. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 6 Open the Box-Training. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. Arc Dome. click Modify. 4 On the File menu. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. select the 3 boxes.

30 Place the box mass family as shown. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter.26 Select the triangle. 31 Select the box and click . In this exercise. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 34 On the View menu. click Place Mass. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. and click . you join these mass elements. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click OK twice. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . 33 On the View toolbar. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 29 In the Type Selector. In the next exercise.

you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 819 .Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.rvt file. . and then press ESC to see the result. click . the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. NOTE When you join geometry. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. 4 Select the triangle.

Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. click 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. click for Axis. on the Edit toolbar.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. enter SM. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. under Views (all). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. under Floor Plans. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.

. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. click . you joined mass elements together. and then select the triangle. In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 821 . 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element.

7 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. enter 90 degrees for Angle.rvt. under Views (all).Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. do not clear the check mark. 8 On the Options Bar. select Sloped (primary). click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. under Floor Plans. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click Place Mass. and select the triangle mass element. select Rotate after placement. (If Design Options is already selected. 1 On the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. and then click OK. 2 On the Window menu. 10 On the Options Bar.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. clear Curved. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 5 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . click .

12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. double-click North. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click Wireframe. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 20 On the Design Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. select the three arc domes. click Place Mass. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. click . 14 In the drawing area. 23 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click . 21 In the drawing area. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . and click . under Elevations. under Views (all). click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify.

and click Wireframe. click . TIP To find the correct shapes. click . 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values.24 On the View Control Bar. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 30 On the View menu. double-click {3D}. 32 Click the value for Design Option. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. select Curved. select Curved from the Design Option menu. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. While pressing CTRL. clear Sloped. and watch the status bar. 29 In the Project Browser. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. and click OK. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics.

click . you pick massing faces to create walls. In this exercise.rvt. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. under Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 .rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. you placed mass elements into Design Options. you can make it the primary option. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. click Make Primary. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. and click Close. 35 Close the warning that displays. 36 On the File menu. click Training Files. select Curved and. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.

click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red.1 In the Project Browser. click . click Orient ➤ Southeast. 9 On the Design Bar.Brick on CMU. click to show the massing model. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . 8 In the Project Browser. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 3. 6 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 5 In the Type Selector. 3 On the View menu. under Views (all). 2 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Floor Plans. double-click {3D}. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Wall by Face. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line.

under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 5. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. 15 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Views (all). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 16 In the Type Selector. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . click Wall by Face. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar.

19 In the Project Browser.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. under Views (all). you pick massing faces to create floors. 20 On the View Control Bar. If desired. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. double-click Level 9. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Wall by Face. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. and click Wireframe. under Floor Plans. click . you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. In this exercise. 21 On the Design Bar.

rvt. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . 3 On the Model Categories tab. 2 On the View menu. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. clear Curtain Panels. and click OK. 4 Click OK. click Floor Area Faces. 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. and Walls. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. Curtain Systems. select all levels. double-click {3D}.

830 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click OK. 10 Press CTRL. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog.8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the View menu. select Levels 1-4. click Modify. click Floor Area Faces. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Orient ➤ Northeast.

15 Press CTRL. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. click Floor by Face. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. under Views (all). 23 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. 16 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 .13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click . 22 On the Options Bar. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. under Floor Plans. click Floor Area Faces. clear Exclude Options. click Create Floors.

In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create roofs. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. double-click Mass Schedule.24 In the Project Browser. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. under Schedules/Quantities. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model.

6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 4 In the Type Selector. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. double-click {3D}.400mm. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. click Create Roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create Roof. click Roof by Face. select Basic Roof : Generic .

12 Click the Model Categories tab. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. Curtain Systems. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. In this exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 11 On the View menu. 9 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Panels. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. and then click OK. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing .Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. and Walls. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise.

rvt. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . click Curtain System by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. click Create System. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. double-click {3D}. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 Press CTRL. 3 In the Type Selector. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

836 | Chapter 21 Massing .7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . 10 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. In this exercise. click Create System.9 On the Options Bar.

click Visibility/Graphics. and Walls. click OK. click Edit/New. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. under Floor Plans. Curtain Systems. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. and click OK. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). Floors. 3 On the Model Categories tab. enter 30000 for Width. 2 On the View menu. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click Site. Roofs. click Duplicate. clear Curtain Panels. Next.

10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 . clear Exclude Options.

17 On the Options Bar.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. you want to select the smaller one. double-click Level 1. click Remake. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click . Also. 15 In the Project Browser. click OK. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. In the next steps. 19 On the View toolbar. TIP To select the curtain wall. under Views (all). 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Floor Plans.

TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors. click Remake. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . 20 Select the roof as shown. 21 On the Options Bar.

You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. you changed the size of an existing mass family.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . 1 Open the 3D view. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. and click Remake. In this exercise. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.

9 Select Mass. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 5 On the View menu. right-click on the 3D view. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 .Massing only.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 Rename the view 3D . and click OK. 8 Click None to clear the selection. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. click All to select all categories. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.

This concludes the massing tutorial.In this exercise. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing . such as columns and an extruded roof. to the building shell. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. If desired. You might create the model shown.

845 . and modify repetitive units. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you also simplify the modification process. For example. In this tutorial. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. You can also nest groups within other groups. or with those working on a different project. By grouping objects. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. place. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. all instances in the building model are updated. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. you not only simplify their placement. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing.

you add the new model group to a previously created group. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. In this exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.rvt. In another exercise. and typical office layouts. Modifying. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the host group is also updated automatically. and double-click First Floor. When you make changes to a nested group. You mirror one instance of the group.Creating. expand Floor Plans. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. expand Views (all). hotel rooms. click Training Files. After you create a model group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units.

click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and click OK.2 Enter ZR.

7 On the Design Bar.The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Zoom flyout. click Modify. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. click Zoom To Fit. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 8 On the View toolbar. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.

12 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click Create Instance. expand Model. under Groups. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . right-click Typical Kitchen.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 14 On the Edit toolbar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror). 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

Creating and Placing a Group | 851 . and on the toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

21 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify. click Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise. one mirrored. you make changes to an instance of a group. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. When you finish editing. as shown. click Save As. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. and one rotated. Modifying a Group | 853 . name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and click Save.

press TAB. 3 Click (Exclude group member). and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. NOTE To display an excluded element. and click to select the wall. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . (Include group member). press TAB. and click to select it. select the element. press TAB to highlight the wall. 7 Click (Exclude group member). 5 Click (Exclude group member). and click to select the door.2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.

click Modify. click Door. click Wall. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 10 In the Type Selector. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Basic Wall : Generic . select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Modify. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. clear Tag on Placement. Modifying a Group | 855 . 14 In the Type Selector.8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left.127mm.

select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 21 On the Options Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . All other elements in the model are grayed out. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall.17 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 23 In the drawing area. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Zoom To Fit. 18 On the View toolbar. Zoom flyout. move the cursor up. click Edit Group. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In edit group mode. click Modify.

all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. Nesting Groups | 857 . and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 28 For Base Offset. double-click First Floor.rvt. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. enter 1000. you add the Typical Kitchen group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. for Unconnected Height. 26 Select the opening.25 On the Design Bar. created in an earlier lesson. under Floor Plans. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. under Constraints. 29 In the group editor toolbar. click Modify. click Finish. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Properties. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. enter 2134. which acts as the host. and on the Options Bar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.

3 On the Options Bar. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . select the Typical Kitchen group. click Edit Group. click (Add to Group).2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the group editor toolbar.

In the next exercise. click Finish. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. such as text. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 In the group editor toolbar. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add door tags to a group. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . and each of the bifold doors. double-click Second Floor. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. and filled regions. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. select the wall between the folding doors. such as door and window tags. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.

rvt. click to draw a rectangular region.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. click Filled Region. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 4 On the Options Bar.

10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Finish Sketch. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Text. and select a point below the left elevator. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 12 Enter Tile. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 On the Options Bar. click to add an arc leader. and on the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 861 .

as shown. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and select the note and the filled region. 16 In the drawing area. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and click Create Instance. under Groups. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click OK. click (Group). Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Edit toolbar. expand Detail. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . 3 On the Options Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout.rvt.21 In the drawing area. click to place the detail group. click Tag ➤ By Category. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. double-click First Floor. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 22 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. clear Leader.

864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . select Door Tags. click Modify. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group).4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click Check None. click (Filter Selection). 8 In the Filter dialog.

15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. for Attached Detail Group Name. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. therefore. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. double-click Second Floor. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . and click OK. click Place Detail. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached.

In this case. accept the default template file. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. and click OK. 3 For File name. click OK. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click Open. click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Desktop. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. browse to the Desktop. When you load the group from the library into a new project. for Create new. and click Save.rvt. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . verify that Same as group name is selected. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. under Groups\Model. select 2 Bedroom Unit. click New ➤ Project. 5 In the New Project dialog.16 On the Design Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). and click Save Group. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. verify that Project is selected. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project.rvt. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.

expand Groups.rvt. 12 On the Design Bar.A warning dialog is displayed. and click Create Instance. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Training Files. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and expand Model. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Link. and on the Options Bar. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. When a group is converted to a link. click Use Existing.

Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Remove Link. 18 In the Project Browser. click Bind. 24 In the message dialog. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Modify.17 On the Design Bar. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 On the Options Bar. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and the link is removed. and click OK. expand Revit Links. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. click OK.rvt file is added as a link to the project. select the linked Revit model. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. verify that Attached Details is selected only.

869 . you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project.Site 23 In this tutorial.

you create a toposurface using two different methods. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the second part of this exercise. expand Views (all). and double-click Site. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. islands. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.rvt. Using the first method. right-click in the Design Bar. click Point. 3 On the Design Bar. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . and then modify the data. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule.Using Site Tools In this lesson. and walkways. and click Site. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 4 On the Options Bar. convert the data to a table. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. You add property lines manually. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. In the final exercises. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_First_Project. click Toposurface. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. expand Floor Plans. This project file was created using the default metric template. you add a building pad to the site.

Use the following illustration as a reference. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Creating a Toposurface | 871 . The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 8 On the Options Bar. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.

click Finish Surface. 11 On the Design Bar. 15000 mm. under Additional Contours. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . enter 1500 mm. 12 On the Settings menu. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12000 mm. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. click Site Settings.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. and click OK. Use the following illustration as a reference. under Increment.

21 Click the Level 2 text. Before importing the contour data. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. enter 1000 mm. and press ENTER. click Yes.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 19 On the Design Bar. click . modify the level names and elevations. rename the level Basement. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 On the View Control Bar. 23 Click the Level 1 text. and press ENTER. click the elevation value. and press ENTER. and click Shading with Edges. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. click Model Graphics Style. 18 In the Project Browser. click to delete it. under Views (all). and double-click South. rename the level Base Site Elevation. on the Standard toolbar. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Modify. 16 On the View toolbar. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 14 On the View toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 873 .

click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select Preserve colors. it is considered an import symbol. Until it is exploded. Under Layer/Level Colors. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. and click OK. Under Import or Link. click Modify. click Training Files. 29 Select the imported topography. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. double-click Site. 31 On the Design Bar. Click Open. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.24 In the Project Browser. 25 On the File menu. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Pin Position. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . 30 On the Edit menu. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar.

33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 34 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 36 On the Design Bar. When you select the import symbol. click Toposurface. and then click OK. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 32 On the View menu. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. when the edges highlight.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. clear Elevations. select it. clear C_INDX.

40 On the View toolbar.rvt. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 43 On the File menu. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Save As. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. you add property lines using two methods. click Finish Surface. name the project Site-in progress. Using the first method. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click .The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 42 On the View toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. this project file is required in its current state. Using the second method. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.

Although you can use your preferred sketching method. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Adding Property Lines | 877 . click Lines. If you have not completed the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.rvt. do so before continuing. Site-in progress. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Using the 3-point Arc tool. select Create property lines by sketching. double-click Site. add an arc line on the right.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. Click Modify. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click Property Line. and click OK. Select and delete the right vertical line.

click OK. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click Property Line. when they highlight. click 12 On the Design Bar. 9 In the warning dialog. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . select the lines. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data.6 On the Design Bar. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. A warning dialog is displayed. click Finish Sketch. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. on the Standard toolbar. and click OK. click OK. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. 15 Starting in Row #1. select Edit Table. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings.

19 In the Tags dialog. and click OK. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 16 Click OK. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.Notice that after you complete the last line. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.rfa. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click Training Files. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click Visibility/Graphics. If the gap is not closed. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to place the property lines. Adding Property Lines | 879 . 23 On the View menu. 22 In the Tags dialog. 20 Click Load. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments.dwg and click OK. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 25 Under Visibility. Before adding property line segment tags. click the Imported Categories tab.

click Tag ➤ By Category. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the final step. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Leader. this project file is required in its current state. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. click Model Graphics Style. The tags display more prominently in this view. 27 On the Options Bar. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 30 On the View Control Bar. you created two sets of property lines. and click Shading with Edges. click to place it. In the next exercise. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. In this exercise. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. click Save. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. right-click in the Design Bar. 31 On the File menu. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. and click Drafting. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880.

10 Under Additional Contours. 7 Click OK. select Single Value. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. click Site Settings. In the Object Styles dialog. Under Line Pattern. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. enter the name Working Contour. and click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. for Subcategory. Under Line Color. click Object Styles. click Model Graphics Style. Under Subcategory. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click New. select Dash dot.0 mm. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Under Range Type. select Topography. select a shade of Brown. under Contour Line Display. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. enter 1000.rvt. 2 On the Settings menu.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Wireframe. select Working Contour. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Site-in progress.

you create topographic subregions to define roads. you create subregions in order to define roads. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. parking areas. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise requires a new dataset. and islands. click Close. Working Contour. such as material. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. In this exercise. The object style subcategory.11 Click OK. In the next exercise. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. parking areas. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. 12 On the File menu. and islands.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. 2 On the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 . and open Metric\m_Site. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. click Subregion.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Lines. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion.rvt. click Training Files.

Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. enter Parking for Name. under Materials and Finishes. click the Value for Material. click Properties. under Identity Data. 9 On the View menu. click Shading with Edges. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. select Site . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.NOTE In the Metric dataset. 6 In the Materials dialog. 884 | Chapter 23 Site . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography.Tarmacadam for Name. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step.

TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. and click Hidden Line. and double-click Topography Schedule. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. expand Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click Shading with Edges. As you create new subregions. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. 18 In the Project Browser.Tarmacadam. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. under Floor Plans. double-click Topography Schedule. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Notice that the project area has increased. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. they display within this schedule. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . click Model Graphics Style. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. click Model Graphics Style. under Schedules/Quantities. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. click Edit Boundary. Delete overlapping lines.

click Properties. click Model Graphics Style.Grass for Name. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. and click OK. click Lines. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 26 In the Materials dialog. 29 On the View Control Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. 30 In the Project Browser.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . and click OK. click Subregion. 28 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click the Value for Material. enter Island . select Site . under Identity Data. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. Within each subregion. under Materials and Finishes. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Hidden Line. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. and click Shading with Edges. double-click Site. In this training project. click Finish Sketch. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 In the upper-right parking area. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Design Bar.Grass for Name. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area.

and apply the material Concrete . Name each region Island . 34 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Name the subregion Walkway.walkway.31 In the Project Browser.Grass. 35 On the Design Bar. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. double-click Site. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 32 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 . under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Site . 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . click Subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. double-click Topography Schedule.Grass. You must sketch each region separately.

you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. double-click Topography Schedule. click Save As. 888 | Chapter 23 Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 38 In the Project Browser. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Design Bar.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. under Schedules/Quantities. 39 On the File menu. there is still only one toposurface.

Grading the Toposurface | 889 . and click OK. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. 3 On the Options Bar. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. under Floor Plans. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter.rvt. double-click Site. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. “Using Phasing” on page 992. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. under Phasing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. 2 Select the toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. click . see the tutorial. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. select Existing for Phase Created. When you use the grading tool. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. A warning dialog is displayed. and click Save. click Modify.

8 Select the topographic surface. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. and click Select and Edit.6 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. click Graded Region. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . select Copy Internal Points.

demolished.10 Press DELETE. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. 13 Press DELETE. and click Hidden Line. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . and new. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style.

and click Shading with Edges. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . 18 On the View toolbar. click . click Point.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Finish Surface. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 20 On the View toolbar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Model Graphics Style. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. click . Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 19 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK. Therefore. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click View Properties. click Save. 23 Select the toposurface. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. and click OK.rvt. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. under Phasing.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. click View Properties. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. and delete it. specify Existing for Phase. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the File menu. When you add a building pad. specify New Construction for Phase. Site tutorial-in progress. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. you create a building pad. only the original toposurface displays. you can delete it. Only the graded topography displays. 24 On the View menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.

2 On the View Control Bar.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Lines. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . the Pick Walls command is active. click Pad. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. If you have an existing building model. NOTE By default.

this project file is required in its current state. Adding Site Components | 895 . you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 7 On the View Control Bar.6 On the Design Bar. click building pad. and click Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style. click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click 9 On the View toolbar. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. . . click Finish Sketch. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. 8 On the View toolbar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Site Components In this exercise.

under Floor Plans. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 3 In the Type Selector.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.90 deg. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Site tutorial-in progress. 5 On the Design Bar. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . double-click Site. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Modify. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Parking Component. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. and select the parking space.

click parking spaces. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adding Site Components | 897 . Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. . click 9 On the View toolbar.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. double-click Site. . 8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Site Component.

12 In the Type Selector. 14 On the View toolbar. 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click . 898 | Chapter 23 Site . choose any tree type.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In the following illustration. Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged.15 On the View toolbar. 16 On the File menu. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. under Floor Plans. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click Save.rvt. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . this project file is required in its current state.

Site tutorial-in progress. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.rvt. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. 4 Under Available fields. click Hidden Line. this project file is required in its current state. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the File menu. click the Fields tab. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. click Save. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Apply. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. and click OK. click Apply. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. select Parking for Category. 5 On the View menu.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Mark. In the following exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. you create a parking schedule. and click Add. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. and click OK.

enter Space. and under Heading. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Views (all). select Type. 12 In the Site plan. 10 In the Project Browser. number the first three spaces consecutively. select Type. under Floor Plans. enter Size. under Space. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. double-click Site. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 8 Under Fields. and under Heading. 11 On the Window menu. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 7 Under Fields. click Tile.5 Under Available fields. If necessary. 13 In the Parking Schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. and click OK. 15 On the File menu. finish numbering the remaining spaces. under Space. 9 On the Window menu. 14 In the Parking Schedule. click Save. and click Add. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. The parking schedule is displayed. click Close Hidden Windows. select Mark.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

You begin by adding the structural walls. 903 . you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton. In the final lesson. columns. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model.Structural 24 In this tutorial. and beams to Level 1. After completing level 1.

specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import). Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise.dwg. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.rvt. and open Metric\m_Structural. under Views (all). you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. and double-click Level 2. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. click Training Files. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. go to the Project Browser.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Import or Link. click Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 4 In the Import/Link dialog. 2 On the File menu. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If necessary. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. under Floor Plans.

right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. select Invert colors. After you trace the walls. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. Structural_tutorial. This file is used in the next exercise. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. and select Origin to origin.■ ■ Select Current view only. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. to trace the initial set of structural walls. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. select Automatically place. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. Select All for Layers. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. 6 Under Positioning.rvt. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . you imported a DWG file. click Save As. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 7 Click Open.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In this exercise. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. 8 On the File menu. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan.

click Structural Wall. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. In the steps that follow. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. rather than the height. 6 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. In addition. Click . you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. First.200mm. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. and click to specify the wall endpoint. 5 In the Type Selector.

click Modify to finish the sketch. and click to complete the chain of walls. and click the next line intersection. 10 Move the curser to the right. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. click . Sketching Structural Walls | 907 .9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 13 On the View toolbar.

zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Structural Wall. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.TIP If necessary. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. On the Options Bar. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. in the View toolbar.

22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.18 On the Design Bar. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . click Modify to end the wall chain. click Structural Wall. 26 On the Options Bar. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. Click to create a three-point arc.dwg and click OK. double-click Level 2.200mm. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. clear m_Wall_Import. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 25 In the Type Selector. 23 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Imported Categories tab. 19 On the View toolbar. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. 21 On the View menu. click . select Basic Wall: Generic .

28 On the Options Bar. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. This is the left extent of the arc. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. This is the right extent of the arc. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. click . 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown.

32 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. and press ENTER. click the value. 34 Select the horizontal wall. If it is not. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. and press Enter. enter 1500. enter 1500.

36 On the Design Bar. Both walls are 1200 mm long. you create the final structural walls for the project. clear Chain. In the steps that follow. 38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below.

double-click Level 2. You then make minor modifications to their position. click Modify. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. This project file is required.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. 41 On the View toolbar. In the next exercise. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. 42 On the File menu. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. In this exercise. Floor Plans. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial.rvt. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. in its current state. click . you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. under Views (all). 40 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls.

Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. click Dimension. select Intersecting Walls. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . and when it highlights. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click OK. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural .3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. the Options button becomes available. 4 On the Options Bar. Select Entire Walls for Pick. select it. 6 Move the cursor to the left. click Options to specify the wall pick options. After you select Entire Walls. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension as shown.

8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 . 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.

click Undo Edit Dimension Length. 12 On the Edit menu. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. joists. This project file is required. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. 13 On the File menu. In this exercise.11 Click the temporary dimension value. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. several different beam types. click Save. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . in its current state. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. you add structural columns. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. In the next lesson.

if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 2 On the View menu. If necessary. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. you use the grid intersection tool. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. under Floor Plans. and you add a column outside the grids. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. click Structural Column. Structural_tutorial. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. 5 On the Options Bar. zoom in to place the column. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. 4 In the Type Selector. TIP When adding the column. In addition. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . double-click Level 1. select Height and specify Level 2.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

918 | Chapter 24 Structural . and A. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids.7 Add similar columns to C2. 9 Use a crossing selection. C3. and C5. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. and select grids 1-5. click Grid Intersection.

Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5.TIP To create the crossing selection. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Adding Structural Columns | 919 . All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. Columns A3-5 are shown below. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position.

21 Select column A5 and delete it. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. 19 On the Options Bar. click Grid Intersection. click Modify. Columns B3-5 are shown below. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. click Structural Column. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . 20 On the Design Bar. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. This completes this set of columns. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. zoom out until you can see all the grids.14 If necessary. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. click Finish. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. click Finish. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. 15 On the Options Bar.

in its current state. you add structural beams to the building model. In the next exercise. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. click Save. In this exercise. As you use the beam tool. This project file is required. click . 26 On the File menu. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click Modify. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. 25 On the View toolbar. “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. you add beams manually. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 .24 On the Design Bar. you used various methods to add structural columns. you learn how to work with these varied conditions.

Dataset This exercise requires the project file. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. under Floor Plans. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 4 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. double-click Level 2. 7 On the Design Bar. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. click Beam. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown.

For example. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. select Girder for Usage. if a beam is joined column-to-column. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. click Grid. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. 11 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 .7. and then move the cursor up to grid A.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. click Beam. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. When you use the grid tool to place beams. 10 In the Type Selector. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. Use the following table for other conditions.

24 Select grid 3. and select grid C. 22 In the Type Selector. enter 8200. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Grid. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 21 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 23 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. click the temporary dimension value. 18 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Beam.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column.

25 On the Options Bar. and for Usage. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids.Notice beams are added between columns. Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. select Chain. click Finish. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. Click column B5 to add the first beam. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. In addition.

28 On the Options Bar. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. You can also use the shortcut key. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. Press ESC to end the chain. connecting the column at B4. select Girder for Usage. select Girder for Usage. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. SI. 30 On the Options Bar. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . to snap only to intersections. Press ESC to end the chain. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines.

7 beam had crossed grid A. 36 On the Options Bar. click Finish. click Grid. If the W310x32. click Grid. 34 On the Options Bar. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. 33 Select grid A. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 .

928 | Chapter 24 Structural . you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 43 In the Type Selector. 44 On the Options Bar. click Beam. select Girder for Usage. In the steps that follow. under Floor Plans. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 On the View toolbar.37 Select grid B. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. double-click Level 2. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. 38 On the Options Bar. click . Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. click Finish.

and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. 48 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 . Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. 47 On the Design Bar. click . click Modify.46 Move the cursor to the right. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints).

51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and select Chain. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 53 On the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. click Beam. double-click Level 2. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. select Girder. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . 52 In the Type Selector. and click when it intersects grid 2. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. under Floor Plans. for Usage. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser.

Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. and click when it intersects grid 1. 57 On the View toolbar. click .

In this exercise. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. 2 Zoom around the A1 . “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. under Floor Plans. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser.58 On the File menu. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add joists and purlins to the building model. 5 On the Options Bar. you add joists and purlins to the building model. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. double-click Level 2. 4 In the Type Selector. click Save. for Usage.7. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method.B3 quadrants. in its current state. You then create a joist array. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. This project file is required. click Beam. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Structural_tutorial. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. For example. In the next exercise. select Automatic.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Structural. click Array. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1.7 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 11 Click OK. you selected the Automatic option. 9 With the beam selected. click Modify. on the Edit menu. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. click on the Options Bar. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist.

This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Once the direction is set. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.13 On the Options Bar. specify the following: Click . enter 1250 and press ENTER. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Enter 14 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural .

18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 .Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam.

Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. Select 2nd for Move to. 21 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. style. and click. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. and color within the Object Styles dialog. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. joists. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. Enter 7 for Number. 20 On the Edit menu. and purlins. specify the following: Click . 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Array.

The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. and click OK. 26 In the Filter dialog. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 . Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. under Other. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click . clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). click . 27 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar.

to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This project file is required. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. click Save. Click OK. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . you create new levels. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. in its current state. 29 On the Design Bar. 30 On the View toolbar. and notice the connection symbols display. click . click Modify. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. In this exercise. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. 31 On the File menu. In the next lesson. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938.

Structural_tutorial. select Make Plan View. 5 On the Options Bar. Defining New Levels | 939 . 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. You need at least 3 meters of space. Click to add Level 3. click Level. under Elevations. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 2 Select grid 1. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Building Elevation. you create several new levels.Defining New Levels In this exercise.

7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. you created three new levels. This project file is required. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. click . Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. In this exercise. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . These levels that are required in the next exercise. 8 On the File menu.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. Each level is 3000 mm high. in its current state. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940.In the Project Browser. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click Save. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

select Level 3. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . 3 On the Edit menu. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. and select Levels 4 and 5. press and hold CTRL. click Copy to Clipboard. In this exercise. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. under Elevations. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Make sure the entire building model is included. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Building Elevation. in its current state. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. In the next lesson. click OK. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. click Save. 8 On the File menu. This project file is required. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942.

You can now view the new elevation. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. under Floor Plans. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. in the Project Browser. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. Structural_tutorial.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . double-click Level 2. click Framing Elevation. 4 On the Options Bar. and click. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you create a framing elevation. Elevation 1-a.

you add c-channel bracing to the building model. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. You are ready to add the structural braces. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. you add structural braces to the building model. click Save. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . In the next exercise. 8 On the File menu. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. Notice the stick framing representation. This project file is required. in its current state. Structural_tutorial. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943.

■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Brace. 3 In the Type Selector. select the view crop box. When adding the braces. you use point-to-point insertion. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown.4. and using the shape grips. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7.

6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.The brace displays. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. The second brace is displayed. Adding Structural Braces | 945 .

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 11 On the Options Bar. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. click Modify. 10 On the Edit menu. click Tag All Not Tagged. Select 2nd for Move to.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. Select Constrain. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. Enter 4 for Number. click Array. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. specify the following: Click . 946 | Chapter 24 Structural .

In this exercise. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. select Structural Framing Tags. Adding Structural Braces | 947 . 16 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click . 17 On the File menu.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Save.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

stairs. floors. All other team members can view this workset. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. doors. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. and so on. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. they cannot make changes to it. such as walls. A workset is a collection of building elements. 949 . you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Using Worksharing.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. In this tutorial. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. however. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. called Worksharing.

Working in a shared project In a shared project. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you specify an active workset. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. such as annotations and dimensions. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you can select which worksets are open or closed.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Elements specific to a view. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. you must first enable Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. The first time you activate worksets within a project. To make a workset editable. and click Editable. In the next exercise. When you are working on a shared project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. go to the Worksets dialog. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. After the project is shared. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. select the desired workset. use Element Borrowing. When setting up Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment.

you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. with each assigned a specific functional task. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Regardless of the default setting. such as a tenant interior. On this tab. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Instead. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When creating the new worksets. Team member roles Typically. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. In a multi-story structure. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. and View worksets. Experience has shown that. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . You should have at least one workset for each person. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. When you create a new workset. As new members create worksets for their own use. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. In most projects. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Shared Levels and Grids. for a typical project. not including the Project Standards. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. each team member has control over a portion of the design. designers work in teams. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets.

After saving to the central file. When you save locally (to your local file). Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Generally. This makes them available to other team members. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Therefore. However. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. proceeds as usual. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. the file is saved as the central file. For example. your changes propagate to the entire team. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you should then save to your local file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . they are not propagated to the rest of the team. When you save to the central file. When finished or at regular intervals. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. your changes are saved. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. This is called “Selective Open. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. if a workset named Interior was created. As you work. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. When you save to the central file.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. however. you can select which workset is active. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you make that workset editable by you. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. within the local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. On the Options Bar. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project.

In this situation. make any required worksets editable. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. reload the latest changes from the central file. for instance. In this instance. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. To do this. Alternatively. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. and open Common\c_Worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. using VPN. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. In the next exercise. When working remotely. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you work no differently then you would in the office.rvt. if you know who checked out the required workset. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. and then save the local file. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. and make that workset editable.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. save to the central file.

The Worksets dialog is displayed. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Only User-Created worksets should display. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. ■ 6 Under Show. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Project Standards. In this case. click Worksets. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. clear Families. In this simple training project. and Views. another is assigned the interior layout. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. When you enable worksharing. imagine four users including yourself. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. and notice all are editable by you. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Your username displays as the present owner. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. For example. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. under Show. 4 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Therefore. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names.

Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. currently named Workset1. clear Visible by default in all views. stairs. however. and walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. 21 Select one of the interior walls. You do. In this training file. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 24 Select all of the interior elements. select Workset1. type the name Exterior Shell. click . under Identity Data. and click OK. 17 In the drawing area. 22 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Worksets dialog. under Identity Data. click OK. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. including the interior doors. expand Views (all). click New. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 12 In the Worksets dialog. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. click . select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 9 Click OK. and click OK. 13 Click Rename. it is better to make them visible by default. expand Floor Plans. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 20 Click OK. 14 In the Rename dialog. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. and double-click Level 1. When you initially activate Worksharing. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. you can rename the default workset. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 10 Click New. 18 On the Options Bar. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model.

select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 25 On the Options Bar.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click . If any interior elements remain. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. under Identity Data. and click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 30 Click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 27 On the View menu. 31 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. click the Worksets tab. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click Visibility/Graphics. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click the Worksets tab.

under Open Worksets. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. under Floor Plans. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select the central file and. In addition. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. In this exercise. and click OK. under Identity Data. 42 In the Worksets dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 35 In the drawing area. you create your local file. make modifications to the building model. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 3 Click Open. select all of the interior elements of the building model. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. make sure you remember the location of this central file. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click Close. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 39 In the Save As dialog. click Open. 45 On the File menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 44 Click OK. 2 In the Open dialog. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. click Worksets. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. under Views (all). this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. click .33 Select Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset. 36 On the Options Bar. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 34 In the Project Browser. check out worksets. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. select Specify. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and click OK. please do so before continuing. 43 On the right side of the dialog. click Save As. Now that you have created the central file. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . double-click Level 2. 40 Click Save. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Non Editable. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need.

you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. and click OK. and select Yes for Editable. and double-click Level 1. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Before working on the model. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Verify that it is cleared. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. 11 Click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 5 On the File menu. 14 In the Project Browser. select Interior Layout for Name.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. expand Floor Plans. click Modify. and click Save. 10 In the Worksets dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. select all the User-Created worksets. notice the Editable Only option. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. click Save As. click Options. 12 On the Window menu. expand Views (all). In this case. If this is selected. select Interior Layout. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Next. click . On the Options Bar. click Worksets. 7 In the File Save Options dialog. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 6 In the Save As dialog. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you should activate the Worksets toolbar.

20 On the Options Bar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. The precise location is not important. 22 On the File menu. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. Because this element is not owned by another user. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. click Wall. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank.126mm Partition (2-hr). 19 Under Constraints. select Basic Wall: Interior .18 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. click Worksets. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. If it was owned by another user. 23 Click OK. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. click . In this case. you can still edit this wall. 25 Delete the door. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. In the Worksets dialog. under Identity Data. however. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. and click OK. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . 28 In the Type Selector. 21 Click OK.

you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. and save locally immediately afterward. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. which matches the information in the Status Bar.30 On the Design Bar. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. click Door. click Save to Central. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. add two door openings into the rooms you created. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. displays the workset as well as the element type. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. At the end of a work session. Borrowed Elements is selected. In this particular case. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. 33 In the Type Selector. you should relinquish all worksets. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. When working in your local file. it is recommended. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. click Modify. a tooltip. Whenever you save. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. By default. you should perform regular saves. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. save to central. In addition.

a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. you created your local file. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. specifically sequenced. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. each user must check out worksets. In this exercise. and reset the Username to your computer login name. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. click Open. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open.rvt. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. under Open Worksets. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). under Username. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. and click OK. You modified the building model. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. In addition. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and reload the latest changes. one user has already created a local file. return to the Settings dialog. enter User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. select the central file and. 8 Click Open. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. checked out worksets. For training purposes. For training purposes. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. two users access the central file through a network connection. User 2: Create a local file. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. consider that person to be User 1. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 3 On the Settings menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. instructions are staggered. click Options. Throughout the process. If you have not yet completed these exercises. and click OK. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. make elements editable. select all the User-Created worksets. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. This is a system setting. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. leave this file open in its current state. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 7 In the Open dialog. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. skip the following section. please do so before continuing. select Specify.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK.

27 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. This file is for your use only. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. modify the building model. click Save to Central. 14 On the File menu. expand Views (all). 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects .” 28 Click OK. If you only have one workset checked out. it becomes the active workset. User 1: Check out worksets. 26 On the File menu. 11 In the Save As dialog. click Worksets. click Options. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Save As. expand Floor Plans. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and click Save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. You are now the owner of that workset. You now have a local copy of the project. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 18 On the File menu.10 On the File menu. 23 In the Project Browser. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. If it is not open. and double-click Level 1. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Views (all). and select Yes for Editable. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and select Yes for Editable. open it now. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. click Worksets. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 16 Click OK. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 22 Click OK. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog.

click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.” 34 Click OK. and click Rename. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. under Views (all). User 1: Reload latest worksets. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. 36 On the File menu. 41 Select Furniture Layout. However. Because you now have more than one workset checked out.” 38 Click OK.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Yes for Editable. 42 On the Project Browser. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. under Floor Plans. select the lower exterior wall. 44 In the Rename View dialog. click Worksets. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Reload Latest. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. under Floor Plans. Before adding any furniture. Click Yes. and click OK. click Component. 40 On the File menu. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 32 On the File menu. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. right-click Level 1. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click Duplicate. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. 43 On the Project Browser. The changes User 2 made are apparent. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. you should create a furniture plan view. and click OK. When you save to central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 45 On the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.

A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. Therefore. rather than Families. 59 In the Rename dialog. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Project Standards. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. such as Wall Types. 60 Click OK 3 times. click Reload Latest.” 54 Click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. click the Worksets tab. click Edit/New. under Show. 49 On the View menu. and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. and click Properties. click Visibility/Graphics. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. and click inside any room. click Worksets. click Save to Central. 61 On the File menu. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 57 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Exterior Wall . leave this file open in its current state. are placed under Project Standards. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. 65 On the File menu. choose any desk. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click Modify. 52 On the File menu. 62 In the Worksets dialog. click Rename. 64 Click OK.47 In the Type Selector. click Save to Central. NOTE System families. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise.200mm. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture.

select Save to Central. click Options. leave this file open in its current state. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and click OK. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. 69 On the File menu. and these problems are rectified. As each of you work. modified the building model. and still have your local files open. select Make this a Central File after save. you save the dataset as a central file. and click OK. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. finished the previous workset exercises. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. select the following. you need to set up your central and local files. select Reload Latest. click Save As.User 1: Reload latest. 3 In the Save As dialog. This exercise requires two users and. and save 68 On the File menu. In the final exercise of this tutorial. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets.rvt. 5 Click Save. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. 70 In the Save to Central dialog. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and published their changes back to the central file. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In subsequent steps. Checking out worksets. Each user must have network access to the central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . click Training Files. There are specific instructions for each user. throughout this training. Each user checked out worksets. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location.

20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select them. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . The central file should still be open. and click OK. 15 Click Open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Save As. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 17 On the File menu. select the central file and under Open Worksets. Afterwards. and click Save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and click Save. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 18 In the Save As dialog. select Specify. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. This is the local file for User 1. This is a system setting. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. On the Settings menu. and click OK.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. click Options. 10 In the File Save Options dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 7 On the File menu. click Save As. click Options. click Open. Next. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. click Worksets. Set the Username to User 2. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. You have created a local file which is for your use only. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 13 On the File menu. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 23 In the Worksets dialog. 9 In the Save As dialog. return to the Settings dialog. In addition. and click OK. click Options. and click Open. 14 In the Open dialog. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu.

Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. verify that Editable Only is cleared. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. under Floor Plans. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 27 In the Worksets dialog. and then click OK. and select Yes for Editable. and then click OK. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 On the left exterior wall. double-click Level 1. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967 . 28 Under Active Workset. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset. select Exterior Shell. select Interior Layout. You are now the owner of that workset. At this point. select the second window from the top. and click Editing Requests. After you submit the request. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 25 Under Active Workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. click the File menu. select the Interior Layout workset.

sel